A^V^^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


// 


^^ 


%^^ 


1 


1.0 


I.I 


■tt  lii  12.2 


tt  114 


lU 

■u 


140 


I2£ 


11:25   im    |L6 

\^=^^  WW^m  W^m 

< 

6"     

► 

•^1 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WIST  MAM  STMIT 

WnSTH,N.Y.  MSM 

(716)a7a-4S03 


'^ 
R^^ 

^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IMicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  da  microraproductions  historiquas 


^ 


Ci^ 


S 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notas/Notaa  tachnlquaa  at  bibliographiquaa 


The  Instituta  haa  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
original  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibliographically  unlqua, 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  aignificantly  changa 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


D 


D 


D 


D 


D 


0 


Coloured  cover*/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I   Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommagAe 


Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurAe  at/ou  pelliculAe 


I      I    Cover  title  missing/ 


Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


I    1   Coloured  maps/ 

LVj   Cartes  giographiquas  en  couleur 


Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 


{~~1   Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 


Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
ReliA  avec  d'autres  documents 


r~y|    Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 


along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  Mure  serrie  peut  causar  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 

distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  intirieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  poaaibla,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  aJoutAes 
lore  d'une  restauration  apparaiasant  dans  le  texte, 
mais.  lorsque  cela  Atait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  At6  filmAes. 


L'institut  a  microfilm*  le  meillaur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  AtA  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  ditails 
da  cat  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniquaa  du 
point  da  vue  bibliographique.  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  Image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mithoda  normale  de  f ilmage 
sont  indiquAs  ci-dessous. 


pn   Coloured  pages/ 


Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagtes 

Pages  restored  and/oi 

Pages  restaurAea  et/ou  pellicuMes 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxet 
Pages  dicolor^tes.  tachatAes  ou  piquAas 


The< 
to  thi 


r~^    Pages  damaged/ 

r~~|    Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 

r~7]    Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 


The  I 
possi 
of  th 
filmii 


Origi 

begii 

theli 

sion. 

othei 

first 

sion, 

or  illi 


□Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d^tachies 

HShowthrough/ 
Transparence 


Transparence 

Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Quality  intgale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  material  suppl<ftmentaira 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  diaponible 


Thai 
shall 
TINl 
whic 

Map 
diffe 
entir 
begii 
right 
requ 
mati 


D 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc..  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata.  una  pelure. 
etc..  ont  6t6  filmtes  A  nouveau  de  fa^on  A 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


Additional  commanta:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmentaires: 


llluttratiom  on  p.  119  &  120  srs  damaged. 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  filmi  au  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-daaaous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


»X 


30X 


y 


12X 


16X 


aox 


a4x 


28X 


32X 


^^WWSa^r^j^ 


laila 
du 

bdifiar 
una 
naga 


Tha  copy  fllmad  hara  has  baan  raproducad  thanks 
to  tha  ganarosity  of: 

Seminary  of  Qutbtc 
Library 

Tha  imagas  appaaring  hara  ara  tha  bast  quality 
possibia  considaring  tha  condition  and  iagibility 
of  tha  original  copy  and  in  kaaping  with  tha 
filming  contract  spacifications. 


L'axampiaira  film*  fut  raproduit  grAca  i  la 
g4n4rosit4  da: 

Mmlnairt  d«  QuAbcc 
BibliothAqut 

Las  imagas  suivantas  ont  Ati  roproduitas  avac  la 
plus  grand  soin.  compta  tanu  da  la  condition  at 
da  la  nattati  da  I'axamplaira  film*,  at  an 
conformity  avac  les  conditions  du  contrat  da 
filmaga. 


Original  copiaa  in  printad  papar  covars  ara  fllmad 
baginning  with  the  front  covar  and  anding  on 
tha  last  paga  with  a  printad  or  illustratad  impras* 
sion.  or  tha  back  covar  whan  appropriata.  All 
othar  original  copias  ara  fllmad  baginning  on  tha 
first  paga  with  a  printad  or  illustratad  impraa- 
sion.  and  anding  on  tha  last  paga  with  a  printad 
or  illustratad  imprassion. 


Laa  axamplairas  originaux  dont  la  couvarturs  an 
papiar  ast  imprimia  sont  fiimAs  un  commandant 
par  la  pramiar  pla<  at  9n  tarminant  soit  par  la 
darniira  paga  qui  comporta  una  amprainta 
d'imprassion  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  la  sacond 
plat,  salon  la  eaa.  Tous  las  autras  axamplairas 
originaux  sont  filmis  sn  commandant  par  la 
pramlAra  paga  qui  comporta  una  amprainta 
d'imprassion  ou  d'illustration  at  an  tarminant  par 
la  darniira  paga  qui  comporta  una  talla 
amprainta. 


Tha  last  racordad  frama  on  aach  microflcha 
shall  contain  tha  symbol  — ^-  (moaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  tha  symbol  V  (moaning  "END"), 
whichavar  applias. 


Un  daa  aymbolas  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
darnlAra  imaga  da  chaqua  microflcha,  talon  la 
cas:  la  symbols  — ^  signifia  "A  SUIVRE  ".  la 
symbols  V  signifia  "FIN". 


Maps,  platas.  charta.  ate.  may  ba  filmad  at  ' 
diffarant  raduction  ratios.  Thosa  too  larga  to  ba 
antiraly  includad  in  ona  axpoaura  ara  filmad 
baginning  in  tha  uppar  laft  hand  cornar.  laft  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  aa  many  framas  aa 
raquirad.  Tha  following  diagrama  illustrata  tha 
mathod: 


Las  cartas,  planchas.  tablaaux.  ate.  pauvant  Aire 
filmAa  A  das  taux  da  rAduction  diff Arants. 
Lorsqua  la  documant  ast  trop  grand  pour  Atra 
raproduit  •n  un  saul  clichA.  il  ast  fiimA  A  partir 
da  I'angla  aupAriaur  gaucha.  da  gaucha  A  droita. 
at  da  haut  an  baa,  an  pranant  la  nombra 
d'imagaa  nAcassaira.  Las  diagrammas  suivants 
iiluatrant  la  mAthoda. 


irrata 
to 


palura. 
n  A 


D 

32X 


1  2  3 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1 


1/6" 


M1TCU£LL*8   PRIMARY   GEOGRAPHY. 


AN 

EASY  INTRODUCTION 

TO  TBS 

STUDY  OF  GEOGRAPHY: 

DStlOMBD    roB   THB 

INSTRUCTION  OF  CHILDREN 

IN  SCHOOLS  AND  FAMILIES. 


II.LDBTRATBO     BT 

ONB  HUNDRED  AND  TWENTY  ENGRAVINGS, 

AND 

rOUHTEEV  MAVS. 


^ 


BY  S.  AUGUSTUS  MITC 

PHILADELPHIA: 
TU0MA8.  COWFERTHWAI 


ia43. 


li 


Kiitered,  according  lo  the  Actoi'  Cnngnm,  in  ttie  year  184.V, 
BY  S.  AITGUSTUS  MITCHKLU 

In  the  clerk'fl  office  of  the  district  court  of  the  eastern  district  of 

Prnnsylvania. 


•'  > 


FRINTRD  BY  J.  EAV   JUN.  AMD  UROTUKlt 


i 


PREFACE. 


Thb  following  work  is  designed  9B  a  first  book  of  Geography,  to  be  twed 
in  the  instruction  of  children  in  Families  and  Schools,  as  soon  as  they  can 
spell  and  read  with  facility.  The  Author  has  endeavoured  to  render  it 
simple  in  arrangement,  and  easy  of  comprehension.  He  has  also  aimed  at 
making  the  descriptive  matter  characteristic  and  concise ;  to  embody  it  in 
short  sentences  and  paragraphs,  and  in  plain  English,  without  being  trifling 
or  childish. 

The  Primaet  Gioorapht  forms  the  commencement  of  a  Series  of  School 
Books^  which,  in  connexion  with  Mitcheirs  School  Geography  and  Atlas, 
Geographical  Reader,  and  High  School  Geography  and  Atlas,  will  elucidate 
the  Geography  of  our  own,  and  the  other  countries  of  the  earth. 

The  work  is  divided  into  eighty-three  Lessons,  seventy-six  of  which  are 
devoted  to  the  illustraticm  of  Geography,  and  seven  relate  to  Astronomy.  A 
few  of  the  first  Lessons  are  arranged  partly  in  the  method  of  Question  and 
Answer ;  and  in  these,  where  the  Pupils  are  required  to  find  the  answers, 
the  latter  are  numbered,  to  agree  with  each  series  of  questions  respectively. 

In  the  first  three-fourths  of  the  bo  3k,  the  words  of  the  answers  are  printed 
in  Italic  type ;  in  the  remainder,  there  is  no  such  distinction,  and  the  pupils  are 
required  to  ascertain  the  requisite  answers  by  their  own  discernment.  It  will 
tiius  be  perceived  that  the  plan  oi  the  Primary  Geography  is  to  lead  the 
learner  forward  by  easy  and  gradual  steps,  so  as  to  prepare  the  youthful 
mind  for  an  introduction  into  a  more  advanced  study  of  this  important 
science. 

The  engravings  in  the  Primary  Greography  are  nearly  all  firom  original 
designs,  and  have  been  introduced,  more  with  reference  to  illustrating  re- 


IT 


PRBFACB. 


|i 


III 


i  1 

4  V 


markable  events,  or  circumfltances  connected  with  the  countriei  to  which 
they  are  attached,  than  for  the  purpose  of  mere  ornament 

Thoae  representing  the  Landing  of  the  Pilgrims,  William  Penn*s  Treaty 
with  the  Indians,  and  Pocahontas  saving  the  life  of  Captain  Smith,  will  pro- 
bably impress  the  mind  of  the  scholar  more  forcibly  with  recollections  of 
New  England,  Pennsylvania,  and  Virginia,  than  any  description  whatever, 
and,  perhaps,  in  many  cases,  will  produce  a  permanent  impression. 

The  whole  of  the  designs  will  be  found  to  be  of  the  same  illustrative  de- 
scription, and  elucidate,  it  is  believed,  in  nearly  all  cases,  some  characteristic 
incident  or  event  The  utility  of  appropriate  engravings,  associated  with 
descriptive  Geography,  is  now  genenUly  admitted ;  and  their  importance  in 
communicating  more  clear  and  vivid  ideas,  requires  but  little  argument 

The  Primary  Geography  contains  Fourteen  Maps ;  a  greater  number  than 
is  to  be  found  in  any  similar  book  hitherto  published.  These  are  made  plain 
and  distinct;  are  specially  adapted  to  the  text,  and,  in  connexion  with  the 
lessons  attached  to  them,  will  be  found  to  add  much  to  the  value  of  the 
work. 

The  introduction  of  moral  and  religious  sentiments  into  books  designed 
for  the  instruction  of  young  persons,  is  calculated  to  improve^  the  heart,  and 
elevate  and  expand  the  youthful  mind ;  accordingly,  wherever  the  subject  has 
admitted  of  it,  such  observations  have  been  made  as  tend  to  illustrate  the 
excellence  of  the  Christian  religion,  the  advantages  of  correct  moral  prin- 
ciples, and  the  superiority  of  enlightened  institutions. 

The  Lesscmo  on  Astronomy,  at  the  close  of  this  little  work,  may  lead  the 
youthful  mind  to  contemplate  the  universe,  of  which  our  earth  is  but  a  part, 
and  thus  form  an  easy  introduction  to  a  knowledge  of  the  most  sublime  and 
imposing  science  that  can  be  presented  to  the  Pupil.  The  lessons  are  plain 
and  easy.  They  are  made  as  free  as  possible  from  abstruse  terms,  and  con- 
tain descriptions  of  a  few  of  the  roost  familiar  and  striking  objects  connected 
with  Astronomy. 


CONTENTS. 


I.  or  the  Cardinal  Pointi 7 

9.  ortheBarth 8 

a.  ortheBurfaeeofthaEarth 0 

4.  Of  the  Water  on  the  Earth JO 

5.  OfRiven 11 

A.  OftheLand 19 

7.  Diviiiona  of  the  Land 13 

&  Of  Mountains,  tuc 13 

9.  Shape  and  Site  of  the  Earth 15 

10.  Motions  of  the  Earth lA 

11.  Of  Climate,  Jbe. 17 

19.  Productions  of  the  Earth 10 

13.  Of  the  People  that  inhabit  the  Earth.  91 

14.  Political  Divisions « 

15.  OfMaps 94 

16.  Grand  Dirisions  of  the  Earth 93 

17.  OftheOeean 96 

18.  Map  of  the  Western  llemisphere,  Ac.  99 
10.  Map  of  the  Eastern  Hemisphere,  hc.»  31 

90.  America 33 

91.  North  America 34 

99.  United  States 36 

93.  United  States  (continued) 38 

94.  Map  of  the  United  States.  Jte 41 

Q.'S.  Eastern  States 49 

96.  MiddleStates 44 

97.  Southern  States 47 

98.  Western  States  and  Territories 49 

99.  Map  of  the  Eastern  States,  tan y^ 

30.  Map  of  the  Middle  States,  &c OS 

31.  Map  of  the  Southern  States,  kjc 57 

39.  Map  of  the  Western  States,  Jte. 59 

33.  Greenland,  British  America,  4cc 60 

34.  Texas  and  Mexico 03 

35.  Ouatimala  and  the  West  Indies.....^  64 

36.  Map  of  North  America,  dec- 67 

37.  History  of  America 68 

38.  History  of  North  America.  ...........  70 

39.  History  of  the  United  States 71 

40.  History  of  United  Sutes  (continaed).  74 

41.  History  of  United  Butea,  Jfee. 76 

49.  South  America... »►.«.»««-.■.■«, «««.,.«  78 

431  Map  of  South  America,  te....  **«.....  81 


u 

44.  New  Ori>nada,  Venexnela,  ttt K' 

45.  Chill,  BiiPiHNi  Ayren,  ftc N 

46.  Hiatnry  nf  South  America H7 

47.  Europt* N* 

48.  Map  of  Europe,  k.r M 

49.  Sweden  nnd  \orway,  Rumin,  ttr. i*t 

50.  Toland,  Dfin.  >arl(,  llollaml,  llol^iimi.     U7 

51.  Great  Britaiv    RuKlnnd,  \Val«>« 0^ 

59.  Scotland,  f  rp).  id.  ikr lUI 

53.  Spain,  PortuKiil,  and  Germany I'M 

54.  Switzerland  and  Italy lOn 

55.  Ionian  Kepuldic,  Gr<><>ce,  and  Turkey  109 

56.  MapofCenlral  and  Southern  Europe.  113 

57.  History  of  Europe 114 

58.  Asia 116 

59.  Asiatic  Rusoia,  Turkey,  and  rfyria.  ■ .  IIP 

60.  PalMitine,  Arabia,  Peraia,  Ace )9l 

61.  Tartary,  India,  and  Ilindooatan 193 

69.  Birmah,  Ac,  China,  and  Japan 196 

63.  Mapof  ADin,^ 19ft 

64.  History  of  Asia 130 

65.  History  of  Asia,  k.t.  (continued) 139 

66.  Aflrica,  Barbnry,  and  Esypt 134 

67.  Nubia,  Senei[(ambin,  and  Guinea 137 

68.  Southern  AfVica,  h,t 140 

60.  Map  of  AiVica,  Ac 113 

70.  History  of  AfVica 144 

71.  Oceanina 146 

79.  Polynesia 149 

73.  Map  of  Oceanica,  4ke 153 

74.  ProKress  of  Society 154 

75.  Government IHI 

76.  Religion ItiO 

ASTRONOMY. 

77.  Astronomy ...-..« 16:« 

78.  Solar  System........ jS4 

70.  Of  the  Moon..... 166 

80.  Planets .^m.*..  lOR 

81.  The  Planets ....«..^...^....  160 

88.  The  Planets  and  CoraaU... .....»«.««■.  171 

83.  ri xed  Stars,  4bc ..-  ..•.......»«  1T6 


ADDRESS  TO  THE  PUPIL. 


Mt  youno  Fribnd:  —  By  studying  this  little  book 
with  attention,  you  will  loarn  many  things  that  will 
please  and  instruct  you ;  you  will  read  about  the  coun- 
try we  live  in,  and  what  grows  in  it,  how  it  is  divided, 
and  what  rivers  and  mountains  it  contains. 

You  will  also  learn  a  great  deal  about  other  coun- 
tries, and  the  people  that  live  in  them :  you  will  be 
taught  where  tea,  coffee,  and  sugar  come  from,  and  what 
parts  of  the  earth  furnish  us  with  oranges,  pine-apples, 
ngs,  almonds,  and  raisins. 

An  account  of  these  things  is  called  Geography,  a 
word  which  signifies  a  descnption  of  the  surface  of  the 
earth.  This  kind  of  knowledge  is  so  necessary,  that 
those  who  are  not  acquainted  with  it  are  reckoned  very 
ignorant. 

Little  boys  and  girls,  although  they  may  never  have 
been  away  from  home,  can,  by  reading  this  and  other 
books  of  the  same  kind  that  the  Author  has  published 
for  their  instruction,  tell  about  the  people,  the  animals, 
the  mountains  and  rivers  of  all  the  countries  in  the  world. 

Many  young  persons  are  well  acquainted  with  Geo- 
graphy ;  they  obtain,  in  consequence,  the  respect  and 
esteem  of  those  who  arc  older  than  themselves,  and  are 
at  the  same  time  regarded  with  pleasure  and  satisfaction 
by  their  parents  and  friends. 

(6) 


PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  1. 

CP  THE   CARDINAL    POINTS. 


In  Studying  Geography,  the  first  thing  you  must 
learn  is,  which  way  *  Norths  South,  East  and  West  Vm : 
These  are  called  the  Cardinal,  or  principal  points  of  the 
compass. 


NORTH 


WEST 


EAST 


SOUTH 


The  sun  rises  *tn  the  East,  and  sets  'm  the  West.  Now 
if  you  stretch  your  arms  straight  out  from  your  body, 
and  point  with  your  right  hand  to  the  East,  the  West 
will  be  *  on  yowr  left  hand,  the  North  will  be  *  before  you, 
and  the  South  ^  behind  you. 

These  things  you  must  try  and  understand  well ;  for 
unless  you   are  acquainted  with  the  Cardinal  [)oints, 

(1) 


8 


PRIMARY    CBOGRAPHY. 


you  will  not  be  able  to  tel!  in  what  direction  different 
countries  lie  from  each  other. 

Now  answer  the  following  Questions  ;  you  will  find 
them  easy,  as  the  words  which  form  the  answers  arc 
printed  in  n  different  type,  and  numbered  to  correspond 
with  the  questions. 

Q.  1.  Which  are  the  cardinal,  or  principal  points  of  the  compass? 
Q^  2.  Where  does  the  sun  rise  1 
d.  3.  Where  does  the  sun  set  1 

Q.  4.  If  you  point  with  your  right  hand  to  the  east,  where  wut  the 
west  be  1 

a  5.  Where  will  the  north  bel 
d.  6.  Where  will  the  south  be  t 


i  ,i 


LESSON  2. 

OF    THE    EARTH. 

Question.  What  do  mankind  inhabit  1 

Answer.  The  surface  of  the  earth. 

d.  What  does  the  earth  form  1 

A.  A  part  of  the  universe. 

Q.  Of  what  does  the  universe  consist? 

A.  The  heavens  and  the  earth. 

Q.  What  do  the  heavens  comprise  1 

A.  The  vast  space  around  the  earth,  which  contains 
the  sun,  moon,  and  stars. 

d.  Who  made  the  universe  1 

A.  God,  the  Creator  of  all  things. 


or    THB    &URFACS    (>F    TUB    BAR  Til.  9 

**  In  the  beginning  God  created  the  heaven  and  the  earth/*— Cuf. 
i.  1. 
Q.  By  what  other  names  is  the  earth  called  1 

A.  The  World,  and  the  Globe. 


•      LESSON  3. 

OP  THB  8URPACB  OP  THB  BARTH. 

a  What  is  the  earth  1 

A.  One  of  the  planets. 

Q.  Of  what  docs  the  surface  of  the  earth  consist  1 

A.  Land  and  water. 

d.  How  much  of  the  earth*s  surface  consists  of  land  1 

A.  A  quarter,  or  one-fourth  part. 

d.  How  much  more  water  than  land  is  there  1 

A.  Three  times  more  water  than  land. 

CL  What  is  the  chief  part  of  the  water  on  the  earth  called  1 

A.  The  sea,  or  ocean. 

For  the  purpose  of  being  more  easily  understood,  different  parts 
of  the  water  are  called  by  different  names,  as  you  will  Icarn  in  the 
next  lesson. 

j    Q-  Are  the  waters  of  the  sea  salt  or  fresh  1 

A.  They  are  salt. 

d.  What  part  of  the  waters  on  the  earth  is  fresh  ? 

A.  Lakes  and  rivers  have  generally  fresh  water. 
There  ure  a  few  lakes  and  rivers  whose  waters  are  salt. 


10 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


Ill 


View  of  the  Ocean. 


■I ! 


^ll 


^iiil 


LESSON  4. 

OF  THE   WATER   ON   THE   EARTH. 

d.  What  are  constantly  sailing  on  the  sea? 

A.  Ships,  steamboats,  and  other  kinds  of  vessels. 

Ships,  &c.,  are  used  for  carrying  people  and  merchandise  from  one 
country  to  another.  Many  vessels  and  fishermen  are  employed  on 
the  sea  in  killing  the  great  whales,  and  catching  the  fishes  of  different 
kinds  that  swim  in  its  waters. 

Q,.  By  what  names  are  difierent  portions  of  the  water  on  the  earth 
called? 

A.  Oceans,  Seas,  Bays,  Gulfs,  and  Straits. 

d.  What  is  an  Ocean  ? 

A.  The  largest  extent  of  water. 

d.  What  is  a  Sea? 

A.  An  extent  of  water  smaller  than  an  ocean. 


OF    THE    WATER    ON    THE    EARTH.        "'  11 

Q,.   What  are  Bays  and  Gulfs? 

A.  They  are  portions  of  the  sea  which  extend  into 
the  land. 

a  What  is  a  strait) 

A.  A  narrow  passage,  which  connects   two 
bodies  of  water. 
Q.  What  is  a  Lake  1 

A.  A  body  of  water  almost  entirely  surround 


LESSON  6. 

0FRIVER8. 

a  What  is  a  River? 

A.  A  Jarge  stream  of  water. 

Rivers  usually  flow /rom  Sprtn^^,  that  rise  among  hills  and  moun- 
tains. Their  branches  are  called  Brooks,  and  Creeks.  The  branches 
of  rivers  are  sometimes  ffo  large  that  they  are  also  called  rivers. 

The  Map  above  will  show  the  source  or  head  spring  of  a  river, 
and  how  rivulets,  brooks,  creeks,  and  other  branches,  flow  into  rivers. 

Q.  From  what  Jo  rivers  usually  flow  1 

d.  What  are  the  various  branches  of  rivers  called? 

d.  What  is  said  of  the  largest  branches  of  some  rivers  ? 

Q^  Into  what  do  rivers  generally  flow,  or  empty  their  waters  ? 

A.  Into  the  sea,  but  some  rivers  flow  into  lakes. 


12 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


i'i::'l 


Q^  How  are  rivers  useful  1 

A.  They  water  and  fertilize  the  earth. 

Many  steamboats  and  other  vessels  navigate  rivers,  and  also  lakes : 
thev  are  used,  as  on  the  sea,  in  conveying  travellers  and  produce  to 
and  from  one  city  or  country  to  another. 

Q.  How  is  the  vast  body  of  water  on  the  earth  restrained  from 
overflowing  the  land  1 

A.  By  the  power  of  the  Almighty,  who,  in  the  begin- 
ning, separated  the  land  from  Uie  water. 

**  And  God  said.  Let  the  waters  under  the  heaven  be  gathered  to- 
gether into  one  place,  and  let  the  dry  land  appear :  and  it  was  so.*' — 
Gbn.  i.  9. 


m 


'.    :'i 


V 


LESSON  6. 

OF   THE    LAND. 

Q.  How  is  the  land  on  the  surface  of  the  earth  diversified! 

A.  By  mountains  and  valleys,  hills  and  plains. 

Q.  How  is  the  land  on  the  earth  divided] 

A.  Into  Continents,  Peninsulas,  Isthmuses,  and  Islands. 

d.  What  is  a  Continent  ? 

A.  The  largest  extent  of  land. 

d.  How  many  Continents  are  there? 

A.  Two,  the  Eastern  and  Western. 

Q.  What  does  the  Eastern  Continent  contain? 

A.  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa. 

d.  What  does  the  Western  Continent  contain  ? 

A.  North  America  and  South  America. 


OF    MOUNTAINS,   Ac. 


13 


LESSON  7. 

DIVISIONS  OF  THE   LAND. 

QL  What  is  the  Eastern  Continent  often  called  1 

A.  The  Old  World. 

Q.  What  is  the  Western  Continent  often  calledl 

A.  The  New  World. 

The  Western  Continent  is  called  the  New  World,  because  it  has 
not  been  so  long  known  as  the  Eastern  Continent. 

Q.   What  is  a  Peninsula  1 

A.  A  tract  of  land  nearly  surrounded  by  water. 

Q.  What  is  an  Isthmus  ? 

A.  A  narrow  tract  of  land  which  joins  a  Peninsula  to 
a  Continent. 

QL  What  is  an  Island  ? 

A.  A  tract  of  land  entirely  surrounded  by  water. 

Q.  What  is  an  Archipelago  ? 

A.  A  sea  containing  many  islands. 

a.  What  is  a  Cape? 

A.  A  point  of  land  extending  into  the  sea. 


;^  LESSON  8. 

OF   MOUNTAINS.   &c. 

Q.  WhatisaMountahAl 

A.  A  tract  of  land  raised  up  to  a  great  height. 

Some  mountains  are  a  hundred  times  higher  than  the  highest 
house  you  ever  saw,  and  their  summits  covered  with  ice  and  snow. 


M 


PRIMARY   GEOGRAPHY. 


.  t 


—      i 


Mnantains,  Hills,  Volcano,  Plains,  Valley. 

d.   What  is  a  Volcano  ? 

A.  A  burning  mountain. 

Volcanoes  send  forth  fire  and  smoke,  and  also  lava,  or  melted  stones, 
from  an  opening  at  the  top  called  a  Crater.  Cities  and  towns  are 
sometimes  set  on  fire  and  destroyed,  by  the  burning  lava. 

a.   WhatisaHilll 

A.  A  portion  of  land  raised  up,  but  not  so  high  as  a 
mountain. 

a   What  is  a  Valley? 

A.  A  low  portion  of  land,  situated  between  hills  or 
mountains. 

Q,   What  is  a  Plain  ! 

A.  A  level  tract  of  land. 

Some  plains  are  fertile  and  well  cultivated  ;  some  arc  covered  with 
grass ;  others  are  covered  with  sand,  and  are  barren. 

Q.   What  is  a  Desert  1  ^v 

A.  A  plain  covered  with  sand. 

The  largest  desert  in  the  world  is  in  Africa ;  it  is  called  tlic  Sahara, 
or  the  Great  Desert. 


SIIAFU    AND    8IZB    OF    THii    GARTH. 


15 


A  Picture  of  onn  side  of  the  Eartli. 


LESSON  y. 

BIIAP£    AND   SIZE    OP   THE   £ARTII. 

You  must  now  learn  something  about  the  shape  and 
size  of  the  earth,  and  how  it  moves. 

By  the  picture  you  perceive  that  '  it  is  roundj  like  a 
ball  or  an  orange.  *  America  is  on  one  side^  and  '  Eu- 
rope, Asia  and  Africa  are  on  the  other  side, 

Q.  1.  What  is  the  shape  of  the  Earth? 
Q.  2.  What  is  said  of  America  1 
Q.  3.  What  is  said  of  Europe,  ^c.  ^ 
A* 


16 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


1 


!i 


I 


U.  What  is  the  circumference  of  the  earth  1 

A.  About  twenty-five  thousand  miles, 
Q.  What  is  the  diameter  of  the  earth  1 
A.  Almost  eight  thousand  miles. 


The  enfi^ravine  will  show  you  that  the  circum- 
ference of  a  body  is  around  the  outside,  and  the 
diameter  is  a  line  across  the  centre,  or  middle  part. 

The  extent  around  the  earth  is  so  great,  that  if 
a  bird  were  to  fly  at  the  rate  of  a  mile  in  a  minute, 
it  would  take  about  seventeen  days  and  nights  for 
the  bird  to  come  round  to  the  place  from  which  it 
started. 

*  The  earth  is  all  the  time  turning  round  and  round ; 
it  never  stops,  but  rolls  like  an  immense  ball  through  the 
heavens,  surrounded  on  every  side  ^  by  the  sky  and  stars. 

O.  4.  What  is  said  of  the  earth  1 

Q.  5.  By  what  is  the  earth  surrounded  on  every  sidel 


LESSON  10. 

MOTIONS    OF    THB    EARTH. 


Q,.  How  many  motions  has  the  earth,  and  what  are  they  1 
A.  Two ;  the  daily  and  the  yearly. 

Q.  What  is  the  daily  motion  of  the  earth  ? 

A.  That  by  which  it  turns  round  once  every  day. 

Q.  What  is  the  yearly  motion  of  the  earth  1 

A.  That  by  which  it  moves  round  the  sun,  once  every 
year. 
0,.  What  is  produced  by  the  daily  motion  of  the  earth  1 

A.  Day  and  night. 


OF   THB    CLIMATE,    Ac.  17 

d.  What  is  produced  by  the  yearly  motion  of  the  earth  1 

A.  A  change  of  seasons. 

Q.  What  is  a  change  of  seasons  1 

A.  The  change  from  winter  to  spring,  from  spring  to 
summer,  from  summer  to  autumn,  and  from  autumn  to 
winter  again. 

In  winter  the  earth  is  covered  with  ice  and  snow.  Spring  is  the 
time  when  the  flowers  are  in  blossom.  Summer  is  the  warm  season 
of  the  year.  In  autumn,  or  fall,  the  flowers  and  plants  decay,  and 
the  leaves  drop  from  the  trees. 


LESSON  11. 

OF  CLIMATE,  ttc. 

In  some  parts  of  the  earth  the  climate,  or  weather, 

is  very  warm ;  in  some  it  is  extremely  cold,  and  the 

ground  is  all  the  time  covered  with  ice  and  snow.     In 

other  parts  the  weather  is  mild  and  pleasant. 

The  warmest  regions  of  the  earth  are  '  near  the  Eguo' 

tor.    The  coldest  regions  are  ^near  the  Poles.    The 

most  pleasant,  or  temperate  regions,  arc  ^within  the 

temperate  Zones. 

Q»  1.  Where  are  the  warmest  regions  of  the  earth  1 

Q.  2.  Where  are  the  coldest  regions  of  the  earth  1 

Q.  3.  Where  are  the  most  pleasant,  or  temperate  regions  1 

On  the  Map  of  the  World  you  will  learn  where  the  warm,  the  cold, 
and  the  temperate  regions  of  the  earth,  are  situated. 

Among  the  principal  nations  of  the  earth,  nearly  all 
the  people  are  employed  in  *  Agriculture^  Manufactures^ 
and  Commerce. 
2 


18 


PRIMARY    GEOGRArilT 


,;     1 

_ — 

1 
t 

"*       ,, 

i 

!     ■  1 

The  farmer  is  employed  in  agriculture,  or  farming 
he  raises  *  wheats  corn,  and  other  kinds  of  food. 

The  manufacturer  makes  •  cloth,  leather,  paper,  and 
many  otlter  articles  ;  nearly  every  thing  that  is  made,  is 
the  work  of  manufacturers  or  mechanics. 

In  commerce,  or  trade,  '  the  productions  of  one  coun^ 
try  are  exchanged  for  those  of  another.  Our  merchants 
send  their  ships  laden  with  cotton,  flour,  fish,  &c.,  and 
exchange  these  articles  with  the  people  of  other  parts 
of  the  world,  for  coflTee,  sugar,  tea,  pepper,  &c. 

0,.  4.  In  what  are  nearly  all  the  people  employed  1 

Q^  5.  What  does  the  farmer  raise  1 

Q.  6.  What  does  the  manufacturer  make  ? 

Q.  7.  What  is  done  in  commerce,  or  trade  ? 


ii 


Here  is  a  picture  of  a  ship  coming  from  a  distant  country,  probably 
from  China,  and  laden  with  tea ;  or  from  South  America,  with  coffee ; 
or  perhaps  she  is  from  Spain,  and  brings  oranges,  raisins,  and 
almonds. 

You  must  remember  what  is  said  of  Agriculture,  Manufactures, 
and  commerce,  for  they  are  often  spolcen  of. 


PRODUCTIONS    OF   THE    EARTH. 


19 


LESSON  12. 

PRODUCTIONS   OF  THE   EARTH. 

The  earth  is  inhabited  by  many  millions  of  human 
beings,  and  also  by  a  vast  numl)er  of  animals  of  differ- 
ent kinds,  comprising  Beasts,  Birds,  Fishes,  Reptiles 
and  Insects.  1  he  Vegetable  and  Mineral  productions 
are  hkewise  various  and  important* 

Q.  What  are  Vegetable  productions  ? 
A.  Flowers,  fruit,  wheat,  com,  coffee,  tea,  and  other 
articles,  that  grow  out  of  the  earth. 


A  Flower. 


PruiL 


Wbeat. 


d.   What  are  Mineral  productions? 

A.  The  various  kinds  of  stones,  with  lime,  coal,  gold, 
silver,  iron,  lead,  and  many  other  things,  that  are  dug 
out  of  the  ground. 

€rold  and  sliver  are  called  the  precious  metals,  because  they  are 
the  most  valuable :  nearly  all  our  money  is  made  of  gold  and  silver 


lilil 


20  PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 

O.  Which  are  some  of  the  principal  Beasts  1 

A.  The  Elephant,  Lion,  Tiger,  Bear,  Horse,  and  Ox. 


A  Beast. 


A  Bird. 


Horses,  Cows,  Dogs,  and  Cats,  are  met  with  in  nearly  all  parts  of 
the  earth,  and  are  called  domestic,  or  tame  animals.  The  Lion  is 
foun  1  only  in  Africa,  the  Tiger  in  Asia,  and  the  Grisly  Bear  in  Ame- 
rica. These  are  wild  animals,  and  are  very  fierce  and  danger- 
ous. 

Q,.  Mention  some  of  the  principal  Birds. 

A.  The  Ostrich,  Eagle,  Pelican,  Turkey,  and  common 
Fowl. 

a.  Mention  some  of  the  principal  Fishes. 

A.  The  Shark,  Swordfish,  Salmon,  Cod,  and  Shad. 


nihe*. 


d.  Mention  some  of  the  principal  Reptiles. 

A.  Alligators,  Lizards,  Snakes,  Toads,  and  Frogs. 


or  TUB   PEOPLE   THAT   INHABIT   THE   KARTIi, 


21 


A  Reptile. 


An  InMCk 


U.  Mention  some  of  the  principal  Insects. 

A.  Butterflies,  Bees,  Spiders,  Musquitoes,  and  Ants. 


LESSON  13. 

OP  THB  PEOPLE  THAT  INHABIT  THE  EABTH. 

d.  From  whom  are  the  people  that  inhabit  the  earth  descended  1 

A.  Our  first  parents,  Adam  and  Eve. 

Ct.  In  whose  image  was  man  created  1 

A.  In  the  image  and  after  the  Ukeness  of  God. 

So  God  created  man  after  his  own  image.— Qcn.  I  27. 
d.  How  do  the*7arious  races  of  men,  or  nations,  differ  1 

A.  Some  are  white,  Hke  ourselves,  and  there  are 
others  that  are  yellow,  red,  brown,  and  black. 

€i.  In  what  other  respects  do  nations  differ  from  each  other  ? 

A.  In  the  language  they  speak,  the  dress  they  wear, 
and  in  the  food  they  eat. 

The  principal  nations  of  white  complexion  are  the 
*  Europeans  J  and  their  descendants :  the  yellow  are  the 


22 


PUIMARY    GBOiiRAl'HY. 


^Chinese,  6ic.:  the  red  arc  the  ^American  Indians  :  the 
brown  are  the  ^  Malay Sy  and  the  black  are  the  ^  Negroes. 

Q.  1 .  Which  are  the  principal  nations  of  white  and  yellow  com- 
plexion 1 

Q,.  2.  Which  are  the  principal  nations  of  red,  brown,  and  black 
complexion  1 


Native  uf  Java. 


Aaliauteu  Cliiur. 


rcmian  Woiiuin 


You  perceive  by  the  pictures  how  differently  other  nations  dress 
f«*om  us,  and  also  from  one  another.  The  native  of  Java  has  the  upper 
}>firt  of  his  body  naked ;  the  Ashantee  chief  has  but  little  clothing  , 
while  the  Persian  woman  is  almost  covered  up  with  her  dress. 


LESSON  14. 

POLITICAL   DIVISIONS. 


Tlie  Continents,  Oceans,  Peninsulas,  Islands,  &c. 
that  \oii  hr.ve  b«-*en  learning  about,  are  cdled  ^Natural 
Diiiijionc,  bet.  Lise  they  were  made  by  the  Creator ;  but 


roL'TICAL   DITI8I0NI.  23 

Empires,  Kinpjdoms,  Republics,  ^c.  are  called  *Politicai 
Divisions,  Tlioy  were  established  I'  men  for  the  pur- 
poses of  government 

Q.  1.  What  are  Continent*.  Oceans,  PeninnuIaA,  dcr.,  called? 
Q.  2.  What  arc  Empires,  Kingdoms,  Republics,  dec,  trailed  ' 

Q.   What  is  an  Empire  1 

A.  A  country  governed  by  an  Emperor. 

.    d.   What  is  a  Kingdom! 

A,  A  country  governed  by  n  King. 

Emperors  and  Kings  are  also  cal  ed  Monarchs  and  Sov^'^gnt. 
The  wife  of  an  Emperor  is  called  an  Empress;  the  wife  of  a  ^  ng  is 
called  a  Q,uecn. 

Q.  What  is  a  Republic) 

A.  A  country  whose  Chief  IVfagistrate,  or  Presii  n% 
is  elected  by  the  people. 

a.  What  is  a  Nation) 

A.  A  distinct  body  of  people,  as  the  English  nation, 
the  French  nation. 

a  What  is  a  City  1 

A.  A  large  collection  of  houses  and  inhabitants. 

Q.  What  are  Towns  1 

A.  Collections  of  houses  and  inhabitants ;  generally 
smaller  than  cities. 

When  a  city  is  the  scat  of  goremment  of  a  country,  it  is  called 
the  CapitaJ.  When  it  contains  a  greater  number  of  inhabitants  than 
any  other  in  the  same  country,  it  is  called  the  chief  city,  or  metro- 
polis. 

Washington  City  is  the  capital  of  the  United  States ;  but  New  York 
contains  ten  times  more  inhabitants,  and  is  the  metropolis,  or  chief 

cur.  . 


24 


or    MAPS, 


W  ' 


LESSON  15. 


OF    MAPS. 


To  understand  the  true  position  of  the  diiferent  coun- 
tries on  the  globe,  it  will  be  necessary,  to  study  the 
Maps  attentively. 

A  Map  is  *  a  picture  of  the  whole,  or  a  part  of  the  earth'' s 
surface  :  it  represents  '^/Ae  form  or  sJiape  of  Continents^ 
Oceans,  Islands,  Lakes,  &c.,  and  also  shows  '^  where 
Rivers,  Mountains,  Cities  and  Towns  are  situated. 

a  1.  What  is  a  Map  1 

Q^  2.  What  does  a  Map  represent  ? 

Q,.  3.  What  does  a  Map  show  1 


A  Map. 

The  top  part  of  a  Map  is  North,  the  bottom  is  South»  the  right  hand 
side  is  East,  and  the  left  hand  side  is  West. 
The  map  before  you  is  a  picture  of  the  United  States,  or  the  coiui- 


GRAND   DIYISIONS   OF    THE    EARTH. 


25 


try  we  live  In.    You  perceive  that  Oceans,  Lakes,  Rivers,  Mountains, 
Boundaries,  Cities,  and  Towns,  are  shown  on  it. 

Now  point  out  on  the  Map,  North  —  South  —  East  —  West. 
Point  out  the  Oceans  —  the  Lakes  —  the  Mountains  —  the  Desert. 
Point  out  the  Boundaries. 

The  Boundaries  are  shown  by  the  dotted  lines  that  separate  one 
country  from  another,  as  the  United  States  from  Mexico. 

Point  out  the  Capitals  —  the  Cities  —  the  Towns. 

The  lines  that  cross  the  map,  from  one  side  to  tlie  other,  are  called 
Lines  of  Latitude,  or  Parallels,  and  show  the  distances,  in  degrees, 
north  or  south  of  the  Equator. 

The  lines  that  extend  from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of  the  map  are 
lines  of  Longitude,  or  Meridians,  and  show  the  distances  east  or  west 
from  a  first  Meridian. 

When  you  come  to  study  other  maps,  you  will  see  how  Islands, 
Gulfs,  Bays,  Peninsulas,  &c.,  are  represented. 

Hereafter  the  Pupil  will  find  the  Questions  at  the  bottom  of  the  same  pages  as  the  Lessons 
to  which  they  are  attached. 


LESSON  16. 

GRAND   DIVISIONS   OF   THE    EARTH. 

The  earth  contains  five  grand  divisions.  These  are, 
*  America,  Europe,  Asia,  Africa,  and  Oceanica, 

America,  or  the  Western  Continent,  comprises  ^North 
America  and  South  America,  It  contains  nearly  a  third 
pirt  of  the  land  on  the  surface  of  the  globe. 

^Europe,  Asia  and  Africa  are  connected  with  each 
other,  and  form  the  Eastern  Continent.  These  divisions 
contain  three-fifths  of  the  land  surface  of  the  earth. 

Questions.  —  1.  What  are  the  grand  divisions  of  the  earth.    2. 
What  does  America  comprise  1    3.  What  forms  the  Eastern  conti- 


26 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


%    • 


Europe  is  *  the  smallest  of  the  grand  divisions,  yet  il 
contains  the  most  powerful  nations.  The  people  of 
Europe  are  called  *  Europeans. 

Asia  is  ®  tJie  largest  grand  division,  and  contains 
more  than  one  half  of  the  population  of  the  earth.  The 
inhabitants  are  called  '  Asiatics. 

Africa  is  ^the  least  known  division  of  the  earth.  The 
chief  part  of  the  inhabitants  are  black,  and  are  called 
^  Africans,  or  Negroes. 

Ocean ica  consists  ^^ entirely  of  islands,  situated  in  the 
Pacific  Ocean.  It  was  the  last  discovered  division  of  the 
world,  and  has  the  smallest  number  of  inhabitants. 


LESSON  17. 

OF  THE  OCEAN. 

The  water  on  the  surface  of  the  globe  comprises 
'  the  Pacific,  the  Atlantic,  the  Indian,  the  Northern  and  the 
Southern  Oceans.  These  are  all  connected  with  each 
other,  and  form  one  vast  sea  or  ocean. 

The  Eastern  and  Western  Continents  are  sepa- 
rated from  each  other  ^  hy  the  Pacific  Ocean  on  the  one 
side,  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean  on  the  other. 

nent  ?  4.  What  is  Europe  ?  5.  What  are  the  people  called  1  6.  What 
is  Asia  ?  7.  What  are  the  inhabitants  called  1  8.  What  is  Africa  1 
9.  What  are  the  inhabitants  called  1  10.  Of  what  does  Oceanica 
consist  1 

CluESTioNs. —  I.  What  does  the  water  on  the  globe  comprise'? 
2.  How   are   the    Eastern    and  Western  Continents   separated  "- 


OF   THE   OCEAN. 


27 


The  Indian  Ocean  flows  between  '  Africa  and  Aus- 
tralia. The  Northern  Ocean  occupies  *  the  most  north- 
erly  parts  of  the  earth.  The  Southern  Ocean  occupies 
^the  most  southerly  parts  of  the  earth. 

•  Wildes^  seals^  turtles^  and  other  marine  animals, 
with  numerous  Fishes^  are  found  in  the  ocean ;  a  great 
variety  of  Plants  also  grow  in  its  waters,  some  of 
which  rise  from  a  depth  of  more  than  two  hundred  feet. 


A  Seal. 


A  Turtle. 


The  ocean  is  preserved  pure  ''by  its  saltness  and 
constant  motion.  When  ships  are  tossed  by  raging  tem- 
pests on  its  waters,  it  exhibits  one  of  the  most  striking 
proofs  of  the  weakness  of  man,  and  the  power  of  Om- 
nipotence. 

By  means  of  the  ocean,  we  are  enabled  ®  to  visit 
foreign  countries.  If  we  wish  to  see  any  part  of  Eu- 
rope, we  can  be  conveyed  across  the  Atlantic  Ocean  in 
one  of  the  splendid  Steam-ships  which  sail  between  the 
United  States  and  EIngland,  in  about  thirteen  days. 

3.  Between  what  countries  does  the  Indian  Ocean  flow  ?  4.  What 
does  the  Northern  Ocean  occupy  J  5.  What  does  the  Southern  Ocean 
occupy  1  6.  What  are  found  in  the  seal  7.  How  is  the  Ocean 
preserved  pure  1    8.  What  does  the  Ocean  .enable  us  to  do  ] 


No.  1  —  WESTERN   HEMISPHERE. 


m 


it 


'i-. 


MAP   OF    THB    WESTERN    HEMISPHERE. 


29 


■«. 


FP 


LESSON  18.^ 

Cs  the  opposite  page  is  a  Map  of  the  Western  Iloinisphere.     A  Henii- 

liore  signifies  half  of  a  glohe.  The  Western  Hemisphere  contains  North 
America,  South  America,  and  part  of  Ocoanici*. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  North  America  —  South  America — Occanica. 
The  two  first  divisions  form  the  Western  Continent 

Point  out  the  Pacific  Ocean — Atlantic  Ocean  —  Northern  Ocean  — 
Southern  Ocean, 

The  Pacific  Ocean  boonds  America  on  the  west;  the  Atlantic  Ocean  on 
the  east ;  the  Nortliem  Ocean  on  the  north ;  and  the  Southern  Ocean  on  the 
eoutlu 

Point  out  the  North  Pole —  South  Pole  —  Equator. 

The  North  Pole  is  the  northern  extremity  of  the  earth :  the  South  Pole  is 
the  southern  extremity.  The  Eauator  is  a  great  circle  that  passes  round 
the  earth,  midway  between  the  ^forth  and  the  South  Poles. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  Arctic  Cirde^'  Antarctic  Circle, 

All  that  part  of  the  earth  situated  between  the  Arctic  Circle  and  the  North 
Pole,  is  the  North  Frigid  Zone.  That  part  situated  between  the  Antarctic 
Circle  and  the  South  Pole,  is  the  South  Frigid  Zone. 

The  Frigid  Zones  are  the  coldest  parts  of  the  earth :  the  ground  is  covered 
nearly  all  Uie  year  with  ice  and  snow. 

Pomt  out,  on  the  Map,  the  TVopic  of  Cancer  —  TVopic  of  Capricorn. 

That  part  of  the  earth  situated  between  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  and  tlio 
Arctic  Circle,  is  the  North  Temperate  Zone.  That  part  situated  between 
the  Tn^ic  of  Capricorn  and  the  Antarctic  Circle,  is  the  South  Temperate 
Zone. 

In  the  Temperate  Zones  the  weather  is  generally  mild  and  pleasant.  The 
North  Temperate  Zone  contains  the  most  important  countries,  and  the  most 
powerful  nations  in  the  world.     We  live  in  the  North  Temperate  Zone. 

That  part  of  the  earth  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Ekiuator,  and  between 
the  Tropic  of  Cancer  and  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn,  is  the  Torrid  Zone. 

The  Torrid  Zone  is  the  warmest  part  of  the  earth.  Here  ice  and  snow 
are  never  seen,  except  on  the  tops  of  the  highest  mountainf.  Coffee,  pepper, 
cloves,  nutmegs,  and  many  fine  fruits,  grow  in  the  Torrid  2k)ne.  The  in- 
habitants are  chiefly  black,  or  of  dark  complexion. 


*  The  Pupil  will  point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  naroea  in  the  lessoni*  that  are  printed  in  Italic 
type,  and  read  with  attention  the  explanations  given  of  them.  This  courn;  will  be  punuod 
with  all  the  lemons  that  are  connected  with  the  Maps. 


Wo.  2.— EASTERN    HEMISPHERE.    •. 


ut 


\\  ' 


(30) 


'  f 


MAP    OP   THE    EASTERN   HEMISPHERE. 


31 


LESSON  19. 

No.  2  is  a  Map  of  the  Elastcrn  Hemisphere,  or  eastern  half  of  the  eartii. 
This  Hemisphere  includes  the  Eosstern  Continent,  and  part  orOccanicu. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  Europe  —  Asia  —  Africa  —  Oceanica.  Tlio  throe 
firdt  of  these  divisions  form  the  Eastern  Continent  About  one-third  part  of 
Oceanica  belongs  to  the  Eastern  Hemisphere,  and  the  rest  to  the  VVciitern. 

Point  out  the  Atlantic  Ocean  —  Pacific  Ocean  —  Northern  Ocean  — 
Southern  Ocean  —  Indian  Ocean.  All  tiiese  oceans,  except  the  last,  are 
parts  of  the  oceans  of  the  same  name  that  are  in  the  Western  Hemisphere. 

Point  out  the  North  Pole —  South  Pole.  These  are  the  same  that  are  on 
the  Map  of  the  Western  Hemisphere.  The  earth  contains  but  one  Nortii 
Pole,  and  one  South  Pole. 

Point  out  the  Arctic  Circle  —  Antarctic  Circle — Tropic  of  Cancer  — 
Tropic  of  Capricorn.  These  are  parts  of  the  lines  of  the  aarne  names  that 
are  on  the  Map  of  the  Western  Hemisphere.  They  all  pass  round  the  earth, 
and  show  the  boundaries  of  the  Frigid  and  Temperate  Zones ;  and  also  of 
the  Torrid  Zone. 

Point  out  the  lines  that  cross  the  Map,  from  side  to  side.    They  are  called 

parallels  of  latitude^  and  are  numbered  10,  20,  30,  &c.     These  figures 

signify  degrees.    Those  between  the  Equator  and  the  North  Pole,  are  in 

•North  Latitude ;  and  those  between  the  Equator  and  the  South  Pole,  are 

in  South  Latitude. 

The  different  parts  of  the  earth  are  said  to  be  in  north  or  south  la.itude, 
according  as  they  are  situated  north  or  south  of  the  Equator. 

Point  out  the  British  Islands— 'Japan  Islands  —  Madagascar  —  Austreh 
lia.  The  two  first  are  in  north  latitudci  and  the  two  last  in  south  lati- 
tude. 

Point  out  the  lines  that  extend  from  the  top  to  the  bottom  of  the  Map. 
They  are  called  lines^  or  meridians  of  longitude.  The  numbers  begin  on 
the  equator,  at  the  line  marked  0,  which  you  will  see  directly  under  the 
vord  Guinea.    This  line  is  called  the  First  Meridian. 

The  other  lines  are  numbered  10,  20,  30,  &c.,  both  east  and  west  of  the 
first  meridian.  Those  parts  of  the  earth  that  lie  eastward  of  the  first  mo< 
ridian,  are  said  to  be  in  east  longitude,  and  those  west  of  it  in  west  longi- 
tude. 

Point  out,  on  tlie  Map,  St.  Helena  —  Java  —  New  Guinea  —  Philippine 
Islands.  The  first  is  in  west  longitude;  and  the  others  in  cast  iongi- 
tude. 


32 


PRIMARY   GEOGRAPHY 


r         I 


LESSON  20.» 

AMERICA. 

1.  America,  or  the  V^cstern  Continent,  comprises 
North  America  and  South  America.  It  contains  the  largest 
riversand  lakes  in  tJw  world^and  also  many  high  mountains 

2.  The  population  of  America  consists  of  Indians^ 
Whites^  and  Negroes,  The  Indians  are  the  native,  or 
first  inhabitants.  The  Whites  are  the  descendants  of 
Europeans.  The  Negroes,  or  Blacks,  were  brought  as 
slaves  from  Africa. 

3.  The  Indians  are  of  a  red,  or  copper  colour.  They 
are  tall  and  straight  in  person,  and  can  endure  great 
hardship  and  fati,5ue. 


American  Tndiani. 


Questions.  —  1.   What  does  America  contain  1    2.  Ofwiiatdocs 
the     population   consist  ?    3.  Of  what   colour   are   the  Indians! 

*  In  the  following  Lpssnns,  the  number  ot  the  heipfinninp  of  ench  pnrnfrmph,  and  that 
U  the  beginning  of  the  Quosliun  annexed  to  it,  will  be  mnde  to  correspond. 


NORTH    AMERICA. 


33 


largest 
ntains 
idians, 
ivo,  or 
nts  of 
ght  as 

They 
great 


at  does 
idians  1 

and  that 


4.  These  people  are  divided  into  a  number  of  small 
nations,  or  tribes.  Many  of  them  are  armed  only  with 
hows  and  arrows,  and  subsist  on  the  animals  they  kill 
in  hunting. 

5.  The  Esquimaux  [Es-ke-m6]  are  a  race  somewhat 
similar  to  the  Indians,  but  are  not  so  tall.  They  live 
in  the  most  northern  parts  of  North  America, 


Esquimau z  Sledges,  and  Winter  Hut. 

6.  The  winter  huts  of  these  p60{^e  are  made  of  slabs 
of  ice,  yet  are  sufficiently  warm  to  shelter  them  from 
the  cold.  The  sledges  on  which  they  travel  from 
place  to  place  are  drawn  by  dogs. 

7.  More  than  one  half  of  the  white  inhabitants  of 
America  speak  tlie  English.,  or  the  language  that  wc 

4.  With  what  are  they  armed  7  5.  Where  do  the  Esquimaux  live  1 
6.  Of  what  are  their  winter  huts  made!  7.  What  language  do 
more  than  one  half  of  the  white  inhabitants  of  America  speak  1 

3 


34 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


• 


use.     Mtiny  speak  the  Spanish,  some  the  Portuguese 
and  French,  and  a  few  speak  the  Dutch. 


LESSON  21. 

^  NORTH    AMERICA. 

1.  North  America  is  the  largest  division  of  the  West' 
cm  Continent,  It  contains  the  most  powerful  nations^  as 
well  as  the  most  populous  cities  in  the  Nc:^)  World,  and 
twice  as  mamj  inhabitants  as  South  America, 

2.  Tlic  principal  rivers  are,  the  Mississippi,  Missouri, 
St.  Lawrence,  Mackenzie's,  Columbia,  and  Rio  del  Norte, 

3.  The  largest  lakes  are,  Superior,  Michigan,  Huron, 
Win7iipeg,  and  the  Great  Slave  L^ike, 

4.  The  most  important  mountains  are  the  Rocky,  the 
Alleghany,  and  the  Mexican  Cordilleras,  The  last  con- 
tain many  volcanoes,  which  send  forth  great  clouds  of 
smoke. 


Panther. 


Black  Bear. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  North  America?  —  What  does  it  contain  1 
2.  Name  the  principal  rivers.  3.  Which  are  the  largest  lakes  1  4. 
Which  are  tlic  most  important  mountains?    5.  Which  are  among 


NORTH    AMCRICA. 


Xi 


5.  The  wild  beasts  of  North  America  are  niimrrons  ; 
/inion<^  the  larf^cst  are  the  Grisly  Bcar^  Black  Bcar^ 
Jht/falo,  Musk  OjCy  Moosc^  Panther^  and  Deer, 

G.  Some  of  the  best  known  of  the  birds,  are  the  Bald 
Eagle ^  Wild  Turkey^  Canvas-haek  Duek^  and  II nmmivs;' 
Bird.  In  the  southern  districts  Alii  gators  are  nu- 
merous ;  and  there  are  many  different  kinds  of  snakes, 
of  which  the  Rattlesnake  is  the  most  dangerous. 


Wild  Turkey. 


Canvai-back  Duck. 


7.  The  principal  countries  of  North  America  are,  the 
United  States,  British  America,  Ilussian  America,  Grecu' 
land,  Texas,  Mexico,  Guatimala  [Gwa-te-mah'-Ia,]  and 
the  West  Indies* 


the  largest  of  the  wild  beasts  1  6.  Which  are  some  of  the  best  known 
birds  1  —  What  are  numerous  in  the  southern  districts  1  —  Whicfi  is 
the  most  dangerous  of  the  snakes?  7.  Name  the  principal  countries 
of  North  America. 


3G 


PRIMARY    GBOGRAHIY. 


LESSON   22. 

UNITED    8TATE8. 

1.  That  part  of  America  in  which  we  live,  is  called 
i^te  United  Slates,  It  is  a  very  large  country,  aiitl  ex- 
liMuls  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacijix  Ocean.  The 
United  States  includes  almost  a  th»rd  part  of  North 
America,  and  more  than  one  half  of  its  inhabitants. 

2.  Many  parts  of  the  United  States  possess  a  rich 
and  fertile  soil.  In  the  eastern,  middle,  and  western 
states,  cor?i,  wheat,  and  rye,  with  apples,  peaches,  pears, 
&c.,  are  cultivated.  In  the  southern  states,  cottoti,  to- 
bacco, rice,  and  sugar,  are  produced  to  a  great  extent. 


Cotton  Plant. 


Rice. 


Sugar  Cane. 

.  Cotton  is  a  kind  of  white  wool,  produced  from  the  Cotton  Plant : 
muslin  and  calico  are  manufactured  from  cotton.  The  leaves  of 
Tobacco  are  made  into  segars,  chewing-tobacco,  and  snuff. 

GtuESTioNs.  —  1.  What  is  that  part  of  America  in  which  we  live 
called  1  —  How  does  it  extend  1  2.  What  are  cultivated  in  the  east- 
ern, middle,  and  western  states  ?  —  What  are  produced  in  the  southern 


UNITED    HiATRS. 


37 


Tho  Sugar  Cane  is  a  plant  somewhat  like  Indian-rnrn ;  the  stalks 
contain  a  s\ve<'t  juice,  which,  being  pressctl  in  u  mill,  runs  out  like 
\vat«T:  great  «|nantltiesof  the  juice  are  boiled  in  larire  pans,  until  the 
sugar  is  made.  Uice  is  a  hard,  white  grain,  which  forms  the  chief 
food  of  tlie  inhabitants  in  many  parts  of  the  earth.  You  have,  no 
doubt,  eaten  some  of  it.  , 

I^  Tron^  coaf,  sail^  and  Ihne^  abound  in  many  quarters. 
(*()ld  is  obtained  from  the  gold  mines  of  Virginia,  North 
Carohna,  and  Georgia  ;  and  vast  auantitics  of  Icc^   .»' 
made  at  the  lead  mincsorMissouri,\Visconsin,and    .^^  't 


I«ad  Mining. 

1.  The  people  oftlie  United  States  are  called  Amcri' 
cans,  and  are  nearly  all  employed  m  agriculture,  manit- 
faciurcsy  and  commerce.  They  are  among  the  most 
iiitelligent,  industrious,  and  enterprising  people  in  the 
world. 


states  J  3.  What  abound  in  many  quarters  1  —  What  is  obtained 
from  the  gold  mines  of  Virginia »  &c.  1  —  What  are  made  at  the  lead 
mines  of  Wisconsin,  &c.  I  4.  What  are  the  people  of  the  United  States 


38 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


t 


;:  i 


M 


5.  Amorican  vessels  sail  (o  all  parts  of  the  earth  ;  and 
the  American  flag,  the  star-spangled  banner,  is  known 
and  respected  by  every  civilized  nation. 

6.  Mai) II  American  Ships  and  Sailors  are  employed 
in  catcliini^  Whales,  Seals,  Codfish,  and  Mackerel.  The 
whale  ships  are  often  absent  two  or  three  years. 

The  oil  wo  burn  in  our  lamps  is  made  of  the  fat  or  blubber  of  the 
Whalo.  Seals  are  killed  for  the  sake  of  their  skins,  or  fur,  of  which 
caps,  &c.,  are  made. 


LESSON  23. 

UNITED    STATE 8— Continued. 

1.  In  the  United  States  there  is  no  nobility ;  every 
citizen  is  equal  in  civil  and  political  rights.  The  son 
of  the  poorest  man  in  the  country,  if  he  attends  to  his 
learning,  and  possesses  abilities,  may  become  President. 

2.  Schools^  Academies^  and  Colleges,  are  established 
in  nearly  every  part  of  the  United  States,  and  almost 
every  one  may  acquire  a  good  education ;  while  in  some 
countries,  but  few  are  able  to  read  and  write. 

3.  St  ram-boat  Sy  Canals,  and  Rail-roads,  are  numerous 
in  the  United  States.  These  all  render  travelling  easy 
and  rapid,  and  enable  us  to  go  from  one  city  to  another 
in  V  very  short  space  of  time. 

called]  — What  are  they  nearly  all  employed  in?    5.  Where  do 

American  vessels  sail  1  6.  What  are  employed  in  catching  whales,  dec. 

Q,UESTioNS.  —  1.  In  what  is  every  citizen  equal?    2.  What  are 

established,  &c.  1  —  What  may  almost  every  one  acquire?    3.  What 


UNITED   STATES. 


39 


merous 


4.  On  the  Great  Lakes,  and  on  the  numerous  rivers 
of  this  country,  steam-vessels  are  employed  in  greater 
numbers  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  world.  Steam- 
boats were  first  brought  into  use  hy  Robert  Fulton^  an 
ingenious  American,  and  were  first  employed  on  the 
Hudson  river ^  in  the  year  1807. 


SteiAnboat  on  m  Weitern  River. 


5.  The  United  States  forms  a  federal  republic^  and  is 
often  called  the  Union,  because  it  consists  of"  a  number  of 
states  united  under  one  government, 

6.  There  are  twenty-six  states,  six  territories,  and  07ie 
district.  The  states  are  divided  into  the  Eastern,  Mid- 
dle, Southern,  and  Western  States, 


are  numerous  1  4.  By  whom  were  steam-boats  first  brought  Into  use  ? 
On  what  river,  and  when  were  they  first  employed  1  5.  What  does 
the  United  States  form  1  —  Why  is  the  United  States  often  called  the 
Union  ?  G.  How  many  states,  territories,  and  districts  are  there  ?  — 
How  are  the  states  divided  ? 


No.  3.  — MAP    OP   THE    UNITED    STATES. 


» 


W         07  06  113  SI  M  m         M  n         «l  79         T7  T6  n         Tl  «         n 


m:v>Br 


i;owjpifw<<>  tffcK/Wwn  tWaXnftow 


IK  le  M  u 


(40) 


MAP   OF    THE    UNITED   STATES. 


41 


LESSON  24. 

No.  3  is  a  Map  of  the  United  States.  This  division  of  North  America 
is  bounded,  on  the  north,  by  British  America;  south,  by  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
1'exas,  and  the  Republic  of  Mexico ;  west,  by  the  PaciHc  Ocenn. 

Near  the  top  of  the  Map,  on  the  right  hand,  or  east  side,  the  scholar  will 
find  Maine  —  New  Hampshire  —  Vermont  —  Massachusetts  —  Rhixie 
Island^  and  Connecticut.  These  six  are  called  the  Eastern  or  New  England 
States.  For  want  of  room  on  tho  Map,  Massachusetts  is  put  thus,  Massa". ; 
New  Hampshire  thus,  N.  Hampshire;  and  Connecticut  thus.  Conn*. 

Point  out  New  York  —  New  Jersey — Pennsylvania^  and  Delaware. 
These  four  are  called  the  Middle  States. 

Point  out  Maryland  —  Virginia  —  North  Carolina  —  South  Carolina  — 
Georgia  —  Alabama  —  Mississippi,  and  Louisiana.  These  eight  are  called 
the  Southern  States. 

Point  out  Florida.  This  belongs  to  the  Southern  States;  but  it  is  a  Ter- 
ritory, and  not  a  State.     It  is  the  most  southern  part  of  the  United  States. 

Near  the  middle  of  the  Map,  the  scholar  will  find  Ohio;  then  Kentucky  — 
Tennessee  —  Indiana  —  Illinois  —  Missouri  —  Michigan  —  Arkansas. 
Point  then  out.     These  eight  are  called  the  Western  States. 

On  the  left  hand,  or  west  side  of  the  Map,  will  be  found  Wisconsin  Ter- 
ritory—  Iowa  Territory,  and  the  Indian  Territory.  Point  them  out.  Far- 
ther  west,  there  are  Missouri  Territory^  and  Oregon  Territory.  The  two 
last  are  not  shown  on  this  Map.  These  five  divisions  are  called  the  Western 
Territories. 

At  the  top  of  the  Map  are  Lake  Superior  —  L.  Huron  —  L.  Michigan  — 
L.  EriCf  and  L.  Ontario.  Point  them  out.  These  are  called  the  Great 
Lakea    They  separate  the  United  States,  in  part,  from  British  America. 

Point  out  the  Mississiopi  River.  This  river  has  its  source  in  Itasca  Lake, 
and  flows  into  the  Gulf  or  Mexico.  Including  the  Missouri,  its  largest  branch, 
the  Mississippi  is  the  longest  river  in  the  world. 

Point  out  Itasca  Lake  —  Missouri  River — Arkansas  R Red  JR. — 

Ohio  R.    These  are  the  largest  branches  of  the  Mississippi  River. 

Point  out  the  Alleghany  Mountains  —  Cumberland  M**  — >  Blue  Ridge. 
These  are  the  principal  mountains  in  the  eastern  part  of  the  United  States. 
The  highest  summits  of  the  Blue  Ridge  are  about  a  mile  and  a  quarter  high. 

Point  out  Washington  —  New  York  —  Philadelphia  —  Baltimore  —  Bos^ 
ton  —  New  Orleans.  Washington  is  the  capital  of  the  United  States:  the 
others  are  the  largest  cities. 


42 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


* 


»f. 


rf 


i  \. 


m 


LESSON  25. 

EASTERN   STATES. 

1.  The  territory  forming  theEASTERN  States,  was  at 
first  called  New  England,  and  it  is  still  known  by  that 
name.  The  climate  in  these  states  is  generally  colder 
in  winter,  and  the  soil  is,  for  the  most  part,  less  fertile 
than  in  the  other  sections  of  the  Union. 

2.  Maine  is  the  largest  of  the  Eastern  Siates,  New 
Hampshire  contains  the  White  Mountains,  and  Ver- 
mont the  Green  Mountains. 

3.  The  population  of  Massachusetts,  Connecticut, 
and  Rhode  Island,  is  greater  than  that  of  any  other  region 
of  equal  extent  in  America. 


SclMol-HouM. 


Emigrant*  to  the  West. 


duESTioNs.  —  I.  What  was  the  territo*  y  forming  the  Eastern  States 
at  tirst  called  1  2.  What  is  Maine  1  3.  What  is  the  population  of 
Massachusetts,  Connecticut,  and  Rhode  Island  J    4.  For  \vh  ,t  are 


EASTERN    STATES. 


43 


4.  The  people  of  New  EnglaDd  are  remarkable  for 
tlieir  industry^  good  morals^  and  general  intelligence, 

5.  Churches^  Colleges,  and  Schools,  are  numerous. 
The  Sabbath  is  respected,  the  churches  are  well  at- 
tended, and  there  are  very  few  persons  to  be  met  with 
who  cannot  read  a^d  ^rite. 

The  inhabitants  of  these  states  are  often  called  Yankees,  a  name 
supposed  to  have  been  first  given  to  them  by  the  Indians,  and  said 
to  signify  EIngUsh.  Numbers  of  these  people  emigrate  every  year  to 
other  sections  of  the  Union*  and  in  the  western  states  they  form  u 
large  and  important  part  of  the  population. 

6.  The  New  Englanders  employ  many  vessels  in  the 
Whale  Fishery,  and  in  catching  Codfish,  and  Mackerel, 
They  manufacture  a  great  variety  and  amount  of 
Woollen,  Cotton,  and  other  kinds  of  goods. 

7.  These  states  possess  more  Ships  and  Seamen,  than 
any  other  section  of  the  Union,  and  their  commerce  is 
very  extensive :  they  send  to  various  parts  of  the  world 
vast  quantities  of  lumber,  fish,  oil,  and  various  articles 
of  domestic  manufacture. 

8.  The  largest  towns  ui  New  England  are,  Boston, 
Lowell,  Providence,  Salem,  Portland,  New  Haven,  and 
Hartford,  Boston  is  noted  for  the  enterprise  of  its  in- 
habitants, its  fine  Tmrhotir,  and  the  great  number  of  its 


J* 


the  inhabitants  of  New  England  remarkable  ?  5.  What  are  nume- 
rous? 6.  In  what  do  the  New  Englanders  employ  many  vessels?  — 
Of  what  do  they  manufacture  a  great  vari<»ty  and  amount  J  7.  What 
do  these  states  possess?    8.  Which  are  the  largest  towns  in  New 


44 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


.      »i 


il 


Moutb  Hoaloa. 


View  of  Boston. 


■uatai's  Uilk 


1).  In  Boston  the  American  Revolution  first  began ;  the 
taxed  tea  sent  from  England  was  destroyed ;  and,  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  city,  the  battles  of  Lexington  and 
Bunker's  Hill  were  fought. 


LESSON  26. 

MIDDLE   STATES. 

1 .  Tub  Middle  States  are  situated  between  the  East- 
ern and  Southern  divisions  of  the  Union.  They  form  the 
viost  populous  and  wealthy  section  of  the  United  States^ 

lid  contain  the  largest  cities  in  America. 

2.  The  climate  is  more  mild,  in  winter^  than  in  New 
England,  the  cold  is  less  severe,  and  does  not  last  so  long. 

Enpland  ?  —  For  what  is  Boston  noted  ?    9,  What  first  began  in 
Boston  1 

duESTioNs.  —  1.  What  do  the  Middle  States  form?    2.  What  is  the 
climate,  compared  with  that  of  New  England !    3.  For  what  are 


fi 


MIDDLE    STATES. 


45 


3.  These  states  are  noted  for  their  numerous  Canals 
and  Rail-roads.  The  people  carry  on  a  flourishing 
commerce,  besides  various  and  extensive  manufactures. 

4,  New  York  has  more  inhabitants  than  any  other 
state  in  the  Union  ;  Pennsylvania  possesses  vast  quanta 
lies  of  Coal  and  Iron  ;  New  Jersey  is  well  known  for 
fine  Fruits  and  Vegetables;  Delaware  produces  excellent 
^Vhcat. 


New  York  Harbour,  Steam-Ship,  dec. 

5.  The  city  of  New  York  is  the  most  populous  on  the 
Western  Continent,  Its  harbour  is  deep  and  commo- 
dious, and  a  great  multitude  of  vessels,  of  all  kind^s 
steam-ships,  &c.,  are  to  be  found  at  its  wharves. 

6.  New  Yr^rk  is  the  metropolis  of  the  United  States, 

these  states  noted  1  4.  What  has  New  York  'i  —  What  does  Penn- 
sylvania possess  1  —  For  what  is  New  Jersey  well  known?  —  What 
does  Delaware  produce]  5.  What  is  the  city  of  New  York!  G.  Of 
what  is  New  York  the  metropolis  1    7.  For  what  is  Philadelphia  dis- 


4G 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


•     • 


M 


and  is  also  one  of  the  greatest  commercial  cities  in  tlio 
world.  Its  merchants  carry  on  a  rich  and  extensive 
trade  with  almost  every  quarter  of  the  globe. 

7.  Philadelphia  is  next  to  New  York  in  the  number 
fjf  its  inhabitants.  It  is  distinguished  for  the  regularilj/ 
(>f  its  streets,  as  well  as  the  beauty  of  its  public  buildings 
and  private  dwellings, 

^:1 


Congren  signing  tlie  Declaration  of  Indeptitden<!e. 

8.  In  the  State  House,  in  Phila<}elphia,  Congress 
signed  and  declared  the  independence  of  the  United  Slates, 
on  the  4th  of  July,  1776. 

9.  Brooklyn,  Albany,  Rochester,  and  Buffalo,  in  the 
s'atc  of  New  York;  Newark,  in  New  Jersey;  Lancas- 
ter and  Pittsburg,  in  Pennsylvania,  and  Wilmington,  in 
Delaware,  are  the  principal  cities  in  the  Middle  States. 

tlnfniishedl    8.  What  was  signed  and  declared  in  the  State  House 
in  Philadelphia  1    9.  Wliich  are  t'iC  principal  cities  in  the  Middle 

t^  tat  OS? 


SOUTHERN   STATES. 


47 


LESSON  27. 

SOUTHERN    STATES. 

1 .  The  South KRN  States  form  tlie  most  southern  part 
of  the  Union,  The  climate  is  generally  warm,  and  ice 
and  snow  are,  in  many  places,  but  seldom  seen, 

2.  Virginia  is  the  largest  of  the  Southern  States,  and 
the  largest  state  in  the  Union.  Washington,  Jefferson^ 
Madison,  and  Monroe,  all  illustrious  patriots,  and  presi- 
dents of  the  United  States,  were  natives  of  Virginia. 

.3.  Many  of  the  inhabitants  of  these  states  are  Plant- 
ers, who  own  extensive  farms,  or  plantations,  which  arc 
cultivated  by  slaves.  The  slaves  are  negroes,  and  form 
about  one-third  of  the  population. 


»^9 

1 

^-■j-  .-^-. 

.-  -    ^  ^b.^ 

'^^--s^m.^^^ 

k?-^- 

^-r-    !■■■ 

'>~-^-~z.--- 

^              --i^S 

^^         '' 

< 

•^O' ,  Lunaa      1 

fi^fni:^' /^■^M:±sm 

^^1^^^^::^ 

r  •——■_■•••■-■       .  ^■w»f*,.;u:r..-Li:.. 

ir>-^H^  ■f '".  •?•" 

Hjj^gig 

a^„.^ •—■•^ 

^-'■.'••"^       -.»•'- T«* 

9B« 

■saks^%#'sna 

Xii^    «r4=lK&^^!^:^«c 

i^^3SS^^ 

-^^ 

Krss»^sss5^.'^maf^i>,:f(^^'<^apaiMr'^ 

i?^.r    ^ 

^¥w§m^^''^^^^ 

■'^"^ 

It 

0' 

>  1' 

V 

*  n   ■     y%    •"■-1 

t-.r           I  \  .>,  /■  . 

Cotton  Fifc^d. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  do  the  Southern  States  form  1    2.  Who  were 
natives  of  Virginia  ?    3.  What  are  many  of  the  people,  &c.  called  ^ 


H 

i 


■''I 


til    i': 

i  m 


48 


I'lJI.MAIlY    liEOGUAl'IlV. 


4.  In  Vir<4ini;i  and  Maryland,  large  quantities  of 
Tobacco  arc  raised.  iVorth  and  South  Carolina, Georgia, 
Alabama,  and  Mississippi,  are  noted  for  Cotton^  and 
Louisiana  for  Sugar  and  Molasses,  Rice  is  cultivated 
in  South  Carolina  and  Georgia,  • 

5.  The  principal  cities  of  the  Southern  States  arc, 
Baltimore,  Washington,  Charleston,  and  New  Orleans, 
lialtimorc  is  iiotetl  for  its  Battle  Monument,  and  the 
Monument  creeled  in  memory  of  General  Washington, 

6.  The  city  of  Washington  is  the  capital  of  the 
United  States.  It  is  situated  in  the  District  of  Columbia : 
here  the  President  resides,  and  Congress  assembler 
every  year. 


If!     TTTT  n 


-»     ::         TT^V 


Capitol  at  Washington. 


4.  What  are  raised  in  Virginia  and  Mary  and?  —  For  what  are 
North  and  South  Carolina,  &c.,  noted  1  —  I 'or  what  is  Louisiana 
noted  1  —  Where  is  rice  cultivated?  5.  Which  are  the  principal 
cities? — For  what  is  Baltimore  noted?    C.  Where  is  the  city  of 


WESTERN    STATES    AND    TEitRITORIBS. 


40 


7.  Con<::rrss  consists  of  the  McmUra  of  the  Senate,  and  Ifouse  of 
litprciteritatictn:  this  body  is  the  legishitiuo  of  the  rnitnl  States, 
and  makes  laws  for  the  government  of  the  nation.  The  house  in 
which  Con«^ress  meets  is  called  the  Capitol,  and  is  the  largest  and 
linest  building  in  America. 

8.  Charleston  is  remarkable  for  Ific  politeness  a  d 
hospitality  of  its  inhohitants.  New  Orleans  is  noted  lor 
tlic  number  of  Ships  and  Steam-boats  that  crowd  its  icvccy 
or  landing  along  the  river.  A  vast  amount  of  sugar, 
molasses,  cotton,  and  tobacco,  is  sent  from  this  city. 


LESSON  28. 

WESTERN   STATES   AND   TERRITORIES. 

1.  The  region  composing  the  Western  States  and 
Territories,  is  often  called  the  Western  Country,  It  is 
situated  to  the  westward  of  the  Eastern,  Middle,  and 
Southern  States, 

2.  The  greater  part  of  these  states  was,  but  a  few 
years  ago,  the  abode  only  of  Indians  and  wild  beasts ; 
but  they  now  contain  a  vast  number  of  white  inhabit- 
ants, and  thousands  of  people  are  every  year  emigrat- 
ing to  this  land  of  plenty. 

3.  Among  the  early  settlers,  Daniel  Boone^  one  of  the  first  white 


Washington  situated  ?    7.  Of  what  does  Congress  consist  1    8.  For 
^hat  is  Charleston  remarkable  1  —  For  what  is  New  Orleans  noted  1 

Questions. —  1.  What  is  the  region  composing  the  Western  States, 
&c.,  often  called  1  2.  What  were  the  Western  States  a  few  years 
ago  ?     3.  Who  was  one  of  the  first  white  men  that  lived  in  Kentucky  1 


50 


PRIMAKY    (:i:OGUAI>IIY. 


•    • 


mm  that  over  lived  In  Koiitncky,  was  nf»to(l  for  his  rDurapo  and 
hardihood:  he  resided  for  a  considerable  time  in  the  solitary  wilder- 
ness, with  no  companions  but  his  dogs. 


Daniel  Boone. 


4.  Ohio  is  the  most  populous  of  the  Western  States^ 
and  is  noted  for  its  canals  and  manufactures.  Ken- 
tucky is  noted  for  its  great  Caves ^  and  Tennessee  for 
Iron  Works, 

5.  Indiana  and  Michigan  contain  extensive  Plains^  or 
Prairies:  Missouri,  Wisconsin,  and  Iowa,  are  cele- 
hrated  for  their  I^nd  Minesy  and  Arkansas  for  its  hot 
Springs, 

6.  Cincinnati^  Lmiisville,  St.  Louis^  Detroit,  Nashville, 
and  Chicago^  are  the  chief  cities  in  the  Western  States. 


4.  What  iii   Ohio  ?  —  For  w  lat  is  Kentucky  noted  1  —  Tennessee  1 

5.  What  do  Michigan,  Indiana,  and  Illinois  contain  1  —  For  what  are 
Missour  .  \  i*consin,  and  lowi.  celebrated  1     Arkansas?    6.  Which 


WESTERN    STATES    AND    TERRITORIES. 


51 


States^ 

Keii- 

(ee  for 


linSy  or 
5  cele- 
its  hot 

simile^ 
States. 


[inesseel 
vtrhat  are 
;.  Which 


7.  Cincinnati  was  founded  in  the  year  1789,  on  a  spot  surrounded 
by  tiiii'k  woods.  It  now  contains  40,(X)0  inhabitants,  and  lius  nun>e- 
rous  churches,  schools,  and  other  public  institutions. 

8.  Nearly  all  the  Indians  in  the  United  States  reside 

in  the  Western  Territories,   Some  of  them  have  good 

Houses  and  Farms,  and  have  been  taught  to  read  and 

write  by  the  missionaries.     Others  roam  over  the  vast 

prairies  of  the  Far  West,  and  hunt  the  Buffalo  and  other 

Wild  Beasts, 

The  missionaries  are  good  men,  who  teacli  savage  nations  to  read 
the  Bible,  worship  the  true  God,  and  to  live  like  Christians. 

9.  The  first  settlers  of  the  Western  States  were  exposed  to  vuiny 
dangers ;  their  houses  were  often  attacked,  and  their  wives  and  chil- 
dren murdered  by  the  Indians:  these  outrages,  however,  now  take 
place  less  frequently,  and  the  savages  are  every  year  becoming  less 
numerous  and  formidable. 


Indians  attacking  While  Settlers. 


are  the  chief  cities 'f  7.  When  was  Cincinnati  founded?  8.  Where 
do  nearly  all  the  Indians,  & c,  reside  1  —  What  do  some  of  them  have  ? 
—  What  do  others  hunt  ?    9.  To  what  were  the  first  settlers  exposed  \ 


No.  4.  — EASTERN   OR   NEW    ENGLAND  STATES. 


m 


MAP  OF  THE  NBW  ENGLAND  STATES. 


53 


LESSON  29.    „     -. 

Map  No.  4  is  a  Map  of  the  Eastern,  or  New  England  States. 

This  division  of  the  United  States  comprises  six  States.  It  is  bounded  on 
the  north  by  Lower  Canada;  south  bv  the  Atlantic  Ocean  and  Long  Inland 
Sound ;  east  by  New  Brunswick  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  west  by  the 
State  of  New  York. 

Paint  out,  on  the  Map,  Maine — New  Hampshire — Vermont — Massac  hit- 
setts — Connecticut — Rhode  Island.  These  are  tiie  Eastern  States.  Maine 
is  the  largest  Rhode  Island  is  the  smallest  State,  and  the  smallest  in  the 
Union.  Massachusetts  contains  more  inhabitants  than  any  of  the  other 
Eastern  States. 

Point  out  Lower  Canada — iVeto  Brunswick — New  York — Atlantic  Ocean 
— Long  Island  Sound. 

Point  out  St.  John^s  River —  St.  Croix  R.  —  Penobscot  R.  —  Kennftbeck 
R.  —  Androscoggin  R.  —  Merrimack  R. —  Connecticut  R. —  Thames  R. 
These  are  the  principal  rivers  in  New  England.  The  St.  John's  river  is 
partly  in  Maine,  and  partly  in  New  Brunswick. 

Point  out  the  White  Mountains — Green  Mountains — Mount  Katahdin. 
These  are  the  principal  mountains  in  the  Eastern  States.  Mount  Washing- 
ton is  the  highest  of  the  White  Mountains,  and  the  highest  in  New  England. 
It  is  about  a  mile  and  a  quarter  high.  The  summit  is  nearly  all  the  time 
covered  with  snow. 

Point  out  Lake  Champlain  —  Moosehead  L.  —  Grand  L.  —  Winnipiseo- 
gee  L.  yWin-ne-pe-so-ge^  Lake  Champlain  belongs  partly  to  Vermont, 
and  partly  to  New  York.  Its  waters  flow  into  Sorelle  River,  and  thence 
into  the  St.  Lawrence. 

Point  out  Grand  Menan  Island  —  Mount  Desert  Island  —  Nantucket 
Island  —  Martha's  Vineyard  —  Block  Island.  The  first  island  belongs  to 
New  Brunswick;  the  second,  to  Mairc;  the  third  and  fourth,  to  Mas^achU' 
setts ;  and  the  fifth,  to  Rhode  Island.  Nantucket  is  noted  for  the  number  of 
vessels  belonging  to  it,  that  are  employed  in  the  whale  fishery. 

Point  out  Augusta — Concord — Montpelier — Boston — Providence — New' 
port — New  Haven — Hartford.  These  cities  are  the  capitals  of  the  New 
'  England  States.    Rhode  Island  and  Connecticut  have  each  two  capitals. 

Point  out  Portland  —  Bangor  —  Portsmouth  —  Newburyport  —  Salem  — 
Lowell — New  London.  These  are  among  the  most  important  cities  in  tho 
Eastern  States,  that  are  not  capitals. 

Point  out  Passamaquoddy  Bay — Penobscot  Bay — Cape  Cod. 


No.  5. —  MAP  OP  THE  MIDDLE  STATES. 


•  » 


H 


I' 
I] 


MAP    OF    THE    MIDDLE    STATES. 


55 


9» 


.  LESSON  30. 

No.  5  is  a  Map  of  the  Middle  States.     This  section  of  the  Union  com 
prises  four  States.     It  is  bounded,  on  the  north,  by  Canada ;  east,  by  New 
England,  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean;  bouth,  by  Maryland  and  Virginia;  and 
west,  by  Ohio  and  Canada. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  New  York  —  New  Jersey  —  Pennsylvania  — 
Delaware.    These  are  the  Middle  States. 

New  York  is  the  largest  of  the  Middle  States ;  Pennsylvania  is  the  se- 
cond in  extent;  New  Jersey  is  the  third  ;  Delaware  is  the  smallest. 

Point  out  Upper  Canada  —  Lower  Canada  —  Vermont  —  Massachusetls 
—  Connecticut —  Ohio —  Virginia  —  Maryland — Atlantic  Ocean. 

Point  out  Lake  Ontario  —  Lake  Erie — L.  Champlain  —  L.  George  — 
i^^ncida  L.  —  Cayuga  L.  —  Seneca  L.  Lake  Ontario,  and  part  of  Lake 
,  Tie,  separate  the  Middle  States  from  Upper  Canada. 

Point  out  the  St.  Lawrence  River  —  Niagara  R.  —  Hudson  R.  —  Dela- 
ware R.  —  Susquehanna  R.  —  Ohio  R.  —  Alleghany  R.  —  Monongulula 
R.  —  Juniata  R.  —  Schuylkill  R,  [Skool'-kil]  —  Genesee  R.  —  Mo- 
hawk R. 

The  St.  I^awrence  river  forms  part  of  the  boundary  between  New  York 
and  Upper  Canada.  The  Delaware  river  forms  the  boundary  between  tiie 
States  of  Pennsylvania  and  New  Jersey. 

Point  out  the  Falls  qf  Niagara.  These  falls  are  the  most  celebrated  in 
the  world.  They  are  in  the  Niiigara  river,  which  forms  part  of  the  boundary 
between  New  York  and  Upper  Canada. 

Point  out  the  Alleghany  Mountains — Blue  Ridge  —  Highlands. 

Point  out  Albany — Trenton —' Harrisburg  —  Dover.  These  are  the 
capitals  of  the  Middle  States. 

Point  out  New  York — Brooklyn — TVoy — Rochester^  and  Buffalo/m 
the  State  of  New  York ;  Newark^  and  Brunswick^  in  New  Jersey ;  PhUa- 
delphia  —  Lancaster^  and  Pittsburg,  in  Pennsylvania  ;  Wilmington.,  in 
Delaware.  These  are  the  principal  cities,  in  the  Middle  States,  that  are  not 
capitals. 

Point  out  Long  Island — Delaware  Bay.  Long  Island  forms  part  of  the 
State  of  New  York. 

Point  out  the  Erie  Canal.  This  work  extends  from  Albany  to  Buffalo, 
It  is  three  hundred  and  sixty  miles  in  length. 

Point  out  the  Pennsylvania  Canal  and  Rail-Road.  These  works  extend 
from  Philadelphia  to  Pittsburg,  three  hundred  and  ninety-four  miles. 


No.       —MAP   OF  THE   SOUTHERN   STATES. 


•  • 


h 


(56) 


MAP    OF    THE    SOUTIIEUN    STATES. 


57 


LESSON  31. 

Map  No.  6,  is  a  Map  of  the  Southern  States.  This  section  of  the  United 
States  comprises  eight  Slates,  one  Territory,  and  one  District 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  Maryland  —  Virginia  —  North  Carolina  —  Sovth 
Carolina  —  Georgia  —  Alabama  —  Mississippi  —  Louisiana.  These  are 
the  Southern  States. 

Point  out  Florida.  This  is  called  a  Territory,  because  it  has  not  a  sufli- 
ciont  number  of  inhabitants  to  entitle  it  to  become  a  State. 

Point  out  Washiyigton  City.  It  is  situated  in  the  District  of  Columbia. 
This  District  is  ten  miles  square.  It  lies  partly  on  the  north  side  of  the 
Potomac  river,  and  partly  on  the  south  side.  You  will  see  the  District  of 
Columbia  on  Map  No.  5.  Besides  Washington  City,  it  contains  the  cities 
of  Georgetown  and  Alexandria. 

The  Southern  States  are  bounded  on  the  north  by  Pennsylvania ;  east,  by 
the  Atlantic  Ocean ;  south,  by  the  Gulf  of  Mexico;  and  west,  by  Kentucky, 
Tennessee,  Arkansas,  and  Texas. 

Point  out  Pennsylvania  —  Atlantic  Ocean  —  Gulf  of  Mexico  —  Keu' 
tucky  —  Tennessee  —  Arkansas  —  Texas. 

Point  out  Annapolis  —  Richmond  —  Raleigh  —  Columbia  —  Milledge- 
ville  —  Tuscaloosa  —  Jackson  —  New  Orleans  —  Tallahassee.  Tho^e  are 
the  capitals  of  the  Southern  States.  Point  out  Baltimore  —  CJinrUston  — 
Savannah — Mobile.  These  are  tlie  chief  cities  in  the  Southern  States 
that  are  not  capitals. 

Poi.it  out  the  Potomac  River  —  James  R.  —  Roanoke  R.  —  Ncuse  R.  — 
Cape  Fear  R.  —  Pedee  JR.  —  Santee  R.  —  Alatamaha  R.  —  St.  John's  R. 
These  are  the  principal  rivers  of  the  Southern  States  that  flow  into  the 
Atlantic  Ocean. 

Point  out  the  Chattahoochee  River  —  Alabama  R.  —  Pearl  R.  —  Missis- 
sippi R.  —  Sabine  R.  These  rivers  flow  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  Tiio 
lower  part  of  the  Chattahoochee  river  ia  also  called  the  Apalachicola. 

Point  out  the  Red  River —  Washita  R. —  Yazoo  R.  These  flow  into 
the  Mississippi.  Point  out  the  Tennessee  R,  —  Kanawha  R.  — Monongu- 
hela  R,     These  flow  into  the  Ohio. 

Point  out  Chesapeake  Bay —  Tampa  Bay  —  Apalachee  Bay.  Roanoke 
river  flows  into  Albemarle  Sound ;  and  the  Neuse  river  into  Pamlico  Sound. 

Point  out  the  Cumberland  Mountains  —  Alleghany  Mountains  —  Blue 
Ridge.  The  Cumberland  mountains  separate  Virginia  and  Kentucky.  The 
Alleghany  mountains  separate  North  Carolina  and  Tennessee. 

Point  out  Cape  Hatteras  —  Cape  Cannaveral  —  Cape  Sable. 


No.  7.— MAP  OF      :1E  WESTERN  STATES  AND  TERRITORIES. 


«  • 


1 

'  '■  ( 

i 

■« 

iM 

'1 

■ 

« 

f 

■  i; 

^i-i 


Longitude  fVurj/rom  IftukiTtgton 


(58) 


MAP    OF    THK    WESTERN    STATES. 


59 


S8 


96 


LESSON  32. 

No,  7  is  a  Map  of  the  Western  States  and  Territories.  This  sect  ion  of  tiio 
TJiiitcd  States  contains  eight  States  and  five  Territories.  It  is  hounded,  on 
the  north,  by  British  America;  south,  by  the  Southern  States;  east,  by  the 
f^tithoni  and  Middle  States ;  and  west,  by  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

Point  ont,  on  the  Map,  Ghio —  Kentucky —  Tennessee —  Indiana —  llli- 
tiois  —  Missouri  —  Michigan  —  Arkansas.    These  are  the  Western  Stat»>. 

l*oint  out  Wisconsin  Territory — Iowa  Territory  —  Missouri  Terrilortj 

—  Indian  Trrriiory.  Farther  west,  is  Oregon  Territory.  It  is  not  hhowii 
on  this  Map,  but  may  be  seen  on  Map  No.  8.  It  extends  along  the  west, 
nr  Pacific  coast  of  the  United  States.  The  Indian,  Missouri,  and  Oregon 
'i'erritoriea,  are  iniiabited  by  Indians. 

Point  out  Lake  Superior  —  L.  Huron  —  L.  Michigan  —  L.  Erie  —  //. 
St.  Clair  —  Itasca  L.  —  Lake  of  the  Woods.  Itasca  Lake  is  the  source  of 
the  Mississippi  River. 

Point  out  the  Mississippi  River  —  Missouri  R.  —  Ohio  R.  —  Illinois 
R.  —  Arkansas  R.  —  Tennessee  R.  —  Wisconsin  R.  —  Iowa  R.  TiiCfsc 
rivers  have  all  given  names  to  States  or  Territories.  The  Kentucky  River, 
on  which  Frankfort  stands,  gave  name  to  the  State  of  Kentucky. 

Point  out  St.  Peter's  River  —  Des  Moines  R.  —  Rock  R.  —  St.  Francis' 
R.  —  White  R.  —  Platte  R.  —  James  R.  —  Kanzas  R.  —  Osage  R.  The 
first  five  rivers  are  branches  of  the  Mississippi.  The  others  are  tranches 
of  the  Missouri. 

Point  out  the  Cumberland  River -^  Wabash  R.  —  Scioto  R.  These  are 
branches  of  the  Ohio. 

Point  out  the  Alleghany  Mountains  —  Cumberland  Mountains.  These 
mountains  separate  part  oi  the  Western  from  the  Southern  States. 

Point  out  the  Choctaws  —  Creeks  —  Cherokees  —  Shawnees.  These  arc 
tlie  mast  civilized  of  the  Indian  Tribes.  Many  of  the  people  have  been 
taught  to  read  and  write,  and  to  cultivate  the  ground. 

Point  out  the  Osages  —  Kickapoos  —  Sacsy  and  Foxes  —  Pawnees  — 
Riccarees  —  Assiniboines  —  Winnebagoes  —  Chippeways  —  Sioux  [1S002]. 
These  Indians  generally  live  by  hunting. 

Point  out  Columbus  —  Frankfort  —  Nashville  —  Indian  upolis  —  Spring- 
field — Jefferson  City  —  Detroit  —  Little  Rock  —  Mad  son  City  —  Bur- 
lington.    These  are  the  capitals  of  the  Western  States  and  Territories. 

Point  out  Cincinnati  —  Louisville  —  St.  Louis  —  Chicago  —  Cleveland 

—  Lexington.  These  arc  the  principal  cities  and  towns,  m  the  Western 
States,  that  arc  not  capitals. 


CO 


PRIMARY    GROCIilAPFIY. 


t  • 


V:|^ 


LESSON  33. 

GREENLAND.   BRITISH   AMERICA,   ttc. 

1.  Greenland  is  the  most  northern  part  of  America^Sind 
lies  much  nearer  to  the  north  pole  than  any  part  of  the 
United  States.  It  belongs  to  Denmark,  and  is  one  of 
the  coldest  countries  in  the  world.  Walruses,  or  Scu 
Cows,  Seals,  and  White  Bears,  abound  here. 


Walruses  —  White  Bean. 


Greenlander  killing  a  Seal. 


2.  The  inhabitants  of  Greenland  are  dexterous  in  the 
management  of  their  Canoes,  and  kill  Seals  in  the  way 
shown  in  the  picture.  Some  of  these  people  have  heei) 
taught,  by  the  missionaries,  to  read  the  Bible,  and  at- 
tend  Christian  worship, 

V 

Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Greenland  1    2.  In  what  are  the  inhabi- 
tants dexterous?  —  What  have  some  of  the  people  been  taught? 


RUSSIAN    AND    RRllISH    AMERICA. 


in 


3.  Russian  America,  or  the  Russian  Possessions, 
occupies  the  most  western  jxtrt  of  America.  This  is  a 
cold,  barren  region,  inhabited  by  Indians  and  Esqui- 
maux, and  a  few  Russians :  the  latter  are  engaged  in 
trading  with  the  natives  for  furs.  | 

4.  British  America  belongs  to  Great  Britain.  It  con- 
tains New  Britairiy  Upper  Canada^  Lower  Canada^  New 
Brunswick^  Nova  Scotia j  and  Newfotindland, 

5.  It  is  very  cold  in  these  regions  in  winter,  and  the 
summers  are  shorter  than  in  the  United  States  ;  yet,  in 
some  parts  of  the  country,  good  crops  of  Indian-cornj 
Wlicatj  &c.,  arc  produced. 


Falls  of  Niagara. 

6.  The  Cataract,  or  Falls  of  Niagara,  surpass  all  otliers  in  the 


3.  What  does  Russian  America  occupy  1  4.  What  does  British 
America  contain  1  5,  What  are  produced  in  some  parts  of  the 
country  1    0.  For  what  do  the  Falls  of  Niagara  surpass  all  others  ^ 


02 


IMl I.MARY    r.F.OfiRAI'FIY. 


•  * 


r'^:' 


world  for  f*r(ir,(h'ur  mul  vuts^nifircnrr :  tlir  wholo  n|  tlir  walor  flow- 
ing' Iroiii  tlu*  ^lont  hikofl,  (lescrnds  ovrr  a  rock  tliat  is  much  higher 
fivan  the  hi«zlirst  houses:  the  roar  of  tho  cataract  is  hoard  for  several 
miles. 

7.  Qiiohoc,  in  Lo^vor  Canada,  is  the  capital  of  the 
Hrilish  Possessions.  It  is  the  most  strotifrly  fortified  citj/ 
in  Amrrica,  and  is  defended  hy  forts,  which  contain 
many  cannon,  and  several  thousand  soldiers. 

8.  New  Knmswick  has  an  extensive  trade  in  timl)cr, 
and  Nova  Scotia  in  Piaster  of  Paris^  Coals^  ^'c.  New- 
foundland is  noted  for  its  Cod  fisheries,  which  employ  a 
great  many  American,,  English  and  French  vessels,  and 
fishermen. 


LESSON  31. 

TEXAS    AND    MEXICO. 

1.  Tfaas  is  a  fine  fertile  country,  settled  principally 
by  people  from  the  United  States.  It  formed  a  part 
of  Mexico,  hut  the  inhahitants  declared  themselves  in- 
dependent, in  the  year  1 836. 

2.  In  the  same  year,  an  army  commanded  by  tlie 
President  of  Mexico,  General  Santa  Anna,  invaded 
Texas;  but  the  Mexicans  were  defeated  at  the  battle 

7.  What  is  Quebec  ?  8.  fn  what  has  New  Brunswick  an  extensive 
trade  1  —  In  wiiat  has  Nova  Scotia  1  —  For  what  is  Newfoundland 
noted  1  —  What  do  they  employ  ? 

Questions.  —  1.  By  whom  is  Texas  principally  settled?  —  When 
did  the  inhabitants  declare  themselves  independent?  2.  Where 
were  the  Mexicans  defeated  1    3.  What  was  Mexico  formerly  called  *» 


TBXA8    AND    IIBXICO. 


63 


of  San  Jacinto,  and  their  general  taken  prisoner. 
AtiHtin  is  the  capital  of  Texas,  and  Galveston  is  the 
chief  seaport. 

3.  Mexico,  formerly  called  New  Spain,  is  an  exten- 
sive country,  which  belonged  to  the  Spanish  govern- 
ment for  almost  three  hundred  years ;  but  it  has  been 
independent  of  that  power  since  the  year  1821. 

1.  The  silver  mines  of  Mexico  have  been  long  celebrated,  and 
have  yielded  immense  wenlth.  One  of  the  mines  is  said  to  extend 
eight  miles  unrler  ground,  and  to  be  a  quarter  of  a  mile  deep. 

5.  Indian-rorny  Sugar,  Coffee,  Indigo,  and  Cochineal, 
arc  the  chief  products  of  this  country.  The  juice  of  the 
Maguey  plant,  or  American  Aloe,  furnishes  the  princi- 
pal drink  of  the  lower  class  of  the  people. 

6.  The  inhabitants  of  Mexico  profess  the  Catholic 
religion :  they  are  composed  of  Whites,  Indians,  and 
otlier  races :  about  one  half  are  Indians,  who  are  par- 
tially civilized,  and  are,  for  the  most  part,  farmers  and 
labourers. 

7.  Mexico,  the  capital,  is  one  of  the  finest  cities  in  America :  it  con- 
tains many  handsome  buildings,  and  is  surrounded  by  lakes  and 
high  mountains. 

8.  On  some  of  the  lakes  in  the  vicinity  of  the  city,  there  arefioat- 
ing  gardens^  that  can  be  moved  from  place  to  place :  a  variety  of 
fine  fruits  and  vegetables  are  raised  on  them. 


—  Since  what  time  has  it  been  independent?  4.  What  have  the 
silver  mines  yielded  1  5.  What  are  the  chief  products  ?  —  What  fur- 
nishes the  principal  drink  of  the  lower  class  1  6.  What  do  the  inha- 
bitants profess  ?  —  Of  what  are  they  composed  1  7.  What  is  Mexico  ^ 
8.  What  are  there  on  some  of  the  lakes  1 


84 


PRIMARY    (iBOGUAI'IIY. 


•  • 


LESSON  35. 

CJUATIMALA    AND   THE    WEST    INDIES. 

1.  GuATiMALA,  or  Central  America,  occupies  Me  most 
southern  part  of  North  America.  Like  Mexico,  it  wnn 
long  subject  to  Spain,  but  is  now  also  indcjKjndent. 
The  soil  is  fertile,  and  silver  mines  arc  numerous. 

2.  Among  the  mountains  of  this  country  there  are  several  volca- 
noes; one  of  these  occasionally  tlirows  out  vast  quantities  of  water: 
it  is  called  the  Water  Volcano. 

3.  Earthqmikca  often  occur,  by  some  of  which  cities  have  been 
destroyed.  San  Salvador  is  the  capital  of  this  republic,  but  New 
Guatimala  is  the  principal  town. 

Earthquakes  arc  violent  shakinffs  of  the  earth,  in  which  the  ground 
sometimes  opens,  and  ingulfs  large  cities  :  lire,  smoke,  and  even 
torrents  of  water,  occasionally  burst  forth  from  those  fearful  openings. 
In  our  happy  country,  earthquakes  seldom  take  place,  and  are  never 
very  violent. 

4.  The  West  Indies  comprise  a  considerable  number 
of  islands,  of  which  Cvba^  Ilayti^  and  Jamaica,  are  the 
largest.  Some  of  these  islands  belong  to  Spain,  some 
to  Great  Britain,  and  to  other  European  nations. 

5.  Hayti,  or  St,  DomingOy  is  inhabited  altogether  by 
negroes,  who  have  become  independent,  and  have  a 
government  and  president  of  their  own.  On  this  island 
the  Jlrst  Spafiish  colony  in  America,  was  established  by 
Columbus. 

Q,0ESTi0N8.  —  1.  What  does  Guatimala  occupy  1  2.  What  is  one 
of  the  volcanoes  called  1  3.  What  often  occur  1  4.  Which  are  the 
jargest  of  the  West  India  islands  1  5.  On  what  island  are  the  ne 
groes  independent !  — What  was  established  here  by  Columbus  1 


THE    WEST    INDIRH. 


f).") 


6.  The  climate  of  llic  West  Indies  is  warm,  and  the 
soil  very  fertile.  Suirar,  Coffee^  Allspice^  Oranrrrs,  Pinc' 
apples^  and  Bananas^  arc  the  chief  products.  A  «^n  jit 
number  of  vessels  trade  constantly  between  the  United 
States  and  the  West  Indies. 


Hurricane  in  the  West  Indies. 

7.  Tremendous  hurricanest  or  storms  of  wind  and  rain,  sometimes 
occur,  in  which  great  damage  is  sustained.  Houses  and  trees  arc 
blown  down  by  the  force  of  the  wind,  and  ships  are  swallowed  up 
by  the  raging  waves  of  the  ocean. 

8.  These  islands  are  inhaiiu  d  mostly  hynegroes^  about  one-fourth 
of  whom  are  slaves.  The  wiate  inhabitants  are  chiefly  planters  and 
merchants. 

9.  Havana  is  the  largest  city  in  the  West  Indies ;  Kingston  is  the 
largest  city  in  the  British  islands,  and  St.  Pierre  [Peer]  in  the  French. 


6.  What  are  the  chief  products  1  7.  What  sometimes  occur  ?  —  What 
are  blown  down  1  —  What  are  swallowed  up  1  8.  By  whom  are 
these  islands  mostly  inhabited  1  —  What  arc  the  white  inhabitants 
chiefly  1    1).  Which  is  the  largest  city  in  the  West  Indies? 

5 


No.  8.  — MAP    OP   NORTH    AMERICA. 


t  •. 


MAF   OF   NORTH    AMERICA. 


67 


la 


LESSON  36. 

No.  8  is  a  Map  of  North  America.  This  is  the  larg^est  division  of  the 
Western  Continent  It  contains  the  most  important  nations,  and  the  chief 
part  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  New  World. 

The  Northern  Ocean  bounds  North  America,  on  the  north ;  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  on  the  west ;  and  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  on  the  east.  The  Pacific  Ocean 
and  the  Caribbean  Sea  bound  it  on  the  south. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  Northern  Ocean  —  Pacific  Ocean  —  Atlantic 
Ocean  —  Caribbean  Sea  —  Baffin's  Bay  —  Hudson's  Bay  —  Honduras 
Bay  —  Qvif  of  Mexico  —  Gvlf  of  California. 

rojtit  out  Bhering*s  [Beer^'ings]  Strait  —  Dams'  Strait — Hudson^ s 
StraU —  Bellisle  [Bel-ile]  Strait.  Bhering*s  Strait  ia  forty  miles  wide.  It 
separates  North  America  from  Asia,  at  the  part  where  they  approach  nearest 
each  other. 

Point  out  the  Rocky  Mountains  —  Mexican  Cordilleras  —  Alleghany 
MourUains  —  Mount  St.  Elias  —  Mount  Brown.  The  highest  mountain  in 
North  America  is  Mount  St  Elias.     It  is  more  than  three  miles  high. 

Point  out  Great  Slave  Lake  —  L.  Winnipeg  —  L.  Superior  —  L.  Huron 

—  L.  Michigan  —  L.  Erie, 

Point  out  Mackenzie's  Rin&r —  Nelson  R.  —  Saskatchawan  R.  —  Missis- 
sippi  R.  —  Rio  del  Norte  —  Columbia  R.  —  St.  Lawrence  R.  The  last  is 
the  river  on  which  Quebec  stands. 

Point  out  tho  West  Indies  •—  the  islands  of  Cidta  —  Hayti  —  Jamaica  — 
Porto  Rico  —  Caribbee  Islands —  St.  StUvador.  The  latter  is  the  first  part 
of  America  that  was  discovered  by  Columbus. 

Point  out  the  Peninsula  of  Alaska —  California —  Yucatan —  Florida — 
Nova  S&Uim. 

Point  out  the  Russian  Possessions  —  Greenland  —  United  States  — 
Texas — Mexico —  Guatimala,  or  Central  America. 

Point  out  New  Britain  —  Canada  —  New  Brunswick  (this  is  represented, 
on  the  Map,  by  the  letters  N.  E)  —  Nova  Scotia  —  Newfoundland.  These 
divisions  comprise  British  America. 

Point  out  Boothia  —  Prince  WiUiam^s  Land — Labrador  —  East  Main 

—  New  Wales.    These  are  districts  belonging  to  New  Britain. 

Point  out  Quebec  —  Washington  —  Austin  —  Mexico  —  St.  Salvador. 
These  are  the  capitals  of  the  North  American  States. 

Point  out  New  York  —  Philadelphia  —  Baltimore  —  La  Puebla  —  /fa- 
vana.  The  first  is  the  largest  city  in  America :  the  last  is  the  largest  in  the 
West  Indies. 


G8 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHYt 


«  » 


■iM^ 


i  .= 


LESSON  37. 

HISTORY   OP   AMERICA. 

Besides  the  geography  of  the  United  States  and  other  parts  of 
America  which  the  scholar  has  studied,  it  is  necessary  that  some 
knowledge  of  the  history  of  those  countries  should  be  acquired. 

1 .  Geography  tells  us  where  a  country  is  situated,  and 
what  it  contains.  By  history  we  are  informed  what 
eveiits  have  taken  place  in  any  particular  part  of  the  earth 
in  times  past. 

2.  America  is  often  called  the  New  World,  because 
it  has  not  been  so  long  known  as  Europe,  Asia,  and 
Africa.  It  was  discovered  in  the  year  1492,  by  Chris' 
tophcr  Columbus,  an  Italian  navigator. 


Columbus  leaving  Talos. 


Questions.  —  I.  What  does  geography  tell  us  1  —  Of  what  are  we 
informed  by  history  ]    2.  When,  and  by  whom,  was  America  dis- 


HISTORY    OF    AiMERICA. 


G9 


3.  Columbus  was  a  learned  and  ingenious  man :  he  supposed  that 
by  sailing  westward  from  Europe,  he  would  arrive  at  the  East  In 
diesj  and  be  able  to  bring  back  with  him  the  gold,  diamonds,  and 
rich  spices  with  which  that  part  of  the  earth  was  known  to  abound. 

4.  After  experiencing  many  delays,  Columbus  set 
sail  from  Palos,  a  port  in  Spain,  and  in  a  few  weeks  lie 
landed  on  St.  Salvador,  or  Guanahaniy  one  of  the  islands 
now  called  the  West  Indies. 

5.  Columbus  found  the  inhabitants  kind  and  friendly^  but  different 
in  form  and  complexion  from  any  race  he  had  ever  before  seen. 
Being  persuaded  that  the  islands  he  had  discovered  were  a  part  of 
India,  he  named  the  people  Indians ;  and  the  term  was  afterwards 
applied  to  all  the  original  inhabitants  of  America. 

6.  On  the  return  of  Columbus  to  Spain,  he  was  received  with  great 
distinction,  and  every  one  rejoiced  at  the  discovery  he  had  made. 
He  afterwards  performed  three  other  voyages  to  America,  during 
which  he  found  other  islands,  and  discovered  the  Continent. 

7.  In  the  year  1499,  Americus  Vespuccius,  also  an  Italian,  visited 
the  New  World.  On  his  return  to  Europe  he  published  the  first 
account  ever  given  of  it,  and  artfully  induced  many  persons  to  be- 
lieve that  he  was  the  original  discoverer :  America  was,  in  conse- 
quence, unjustly  named  after  him,  instead  of  Columbus. 

8.  Being  found  to  contain  great  quantities  of  gold  and  silver, 
America  was  soon  visited  by  many  unprincipled  Spaniards,  who,  in 
their  pursuit  after  wealth,  robbed  tne  natives,  and  treated  them  with 
great  cruelty. 


covered  1  3.  At  what  part  of  the  earth  did  Columbus  suppose  he 
would  arrive  1  4.  From  what  port  did  he  set  sail  1  —  On  what  island 
did  he  land  1  5.  What  did  Columbus  find  the  inhabitants  to  be  1  — 
What  did  he  call  them  1  6.  How  was  Columbus  received,  on  his  re- 
turn to  Spain  1  —  What  did  he  afterwards  perform  1  7.  When  did 
Americus  Vespucius  visit  the  New  World  1  8.  What  was  America 
found  to  contain  1 


70 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


i'.,. 


'm 


LESSON  38. 

IlIBTOFY    OF   NORTH    AMERICA. 

1.  America,  at  tho  time  it  was  discovered,  contained 
two  populous  Empires ;  Mexico,  in  North,  and  Peru,  in 
South  America. 

2.  The  inhabitants  of  these  countries  were  not  sa- 
vages, like  many  of  the  other  Indians ;  they  had  regu- 
lar governments,  and  lived  in  cities  and  toums  of  some 
extent,  one  of  which,  the  city  of  Mexico,  was  so  large, 
that  it  was  supposed  to  contain  twenty  thousand  houses. 

3.  In  a  short  time  Cortez^  a  Spanish  General^  landed  in  Mexico, 
and  began  ihe  conquest  of  that  country :  his  soldiers  were  supplied 
with  guns,  cannon  and  horses.  The  Mexicans,  though  much  more 
numerous,  were  armed  only  with  bows  and  arrows,  and  clubs. 

4.  The  fire  and  noise  of  the  cannon  were  by  them  believed  to 
be  lightning  and  thunder  from  heaven;  and  the  horses,  which  they  had 
never  before  seen,  they  supposed  to  be,  with  their  riders,  hideotts  and 
cruel  nwnsters.  The  Mexicans  were,  in  consequence,  terrified  and 
alarmed,  and  were  finally  subdued  by  the  Spani£^*ds. 

5.  The  first  settlement  or  colony  established  in  the 
country  we  inhabit,  was  made  by  people  from  England, 
in  the  year  1607.  The  first  town  they  built  was  James- 
town, on  James  river,  in  Virginia. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  empires  were  in  America  at  the  time  it  was 
discovered !  2.  What  had  the  inhabitants  1 — In  what  did  they  live  ? 
3.  Who  landed  in  Mexico  1  4.  What  did  these  people  believe  the 
fire  and  noise  of  the  cannon  to  be  1  —  What  did  they  suppose  the 
horses  and  their  riders  to  be  1  6,  By  whom  was  the  first  settle- 
ment, &r.,  made,  and  in  what  year  ?  —  What  town  did  they  build  1 


HISTORy    OF   NORTH    AMERICA. 


71 


6.  The  settlers  were  often  attacked  bv  the  natives,  and  fought 
many  battles  with  them,  in  one  of  which,  Captain  John  Smitf^  a 
brave  and  gallant  soldier,  was  talcen  prisoner. 


Focahontas  raving  the  Lire  of  Captain  Smith. 

7.  Captain  Smith  was  condemned  to  death ;  and»  when  the  savages 
were  about  to  destroy  him  with  their  clubs,  Pocahontas^  the  daugh- 
ter of  the  Indian  chief  into  whose  power  he  had  fallen,  interceded  for 
him,  and  induced  her  father  to  spare  his  life. 

8.  He  returned  to  Jamestown,  and  was  received  by  his  friends  with 
joy  and  gladness.  Pocahontas,  his  deliverer,  was,  some  time  after- 
wards, married  to  an  Englishman  of  the  name  of  Rolfe^  who  carried 
her  to  England,  where  she  was  presented  to  King  James  I. 


LESSON  39. 

HISTORY   OP   THE  UNITEn   STATES. 

1.  At  various  periods,  within  seventy  or  eighty  years 
after  the  settlement  of  Virginia,  colonies  were  estab- 

6.  Who  was  taken  prisoner  by  the  Indians?  7.  Who  induced  her 
fiither  to  spare  Captain  Smith's  life?  8.  To  whom  was  Pocahontas 
married? 

duESTioNs. —  1.  Where  were  colonies  established  by  the  English  Y 

D 


72 


PRIMARY    CiFSOGUAPIIY. 


•  • 


,\i  >       1' 


lishcd  by  the  Eriglisli,  in  New  England^  Pcnnsyivmiia, 
Maryland,,  and  the  Carolinas, 

2.  New  York  was  colonized  by  the  Dutch,  but  wa :;  rjflerwarda  con- 
qiiored  by  the  English.  New  Jersey  was  at  first .' ettl-td  by  the  Honen , 
Delaware  by  the  l^wedes  and  fSnns;  and  Mlchiirrn,  7ripr^;3,  ■'■<<:..  by 
Hie  French.    All  these  colonies  became  in  time  British  piovin'.  ,?,. 


Landing  of  the  Pilgrimv. 

3.  The  first  white  inhabitants  of  New  England  landed 
ui  Plymouth,  in  the  year  1620,  and  were  called  the  Pil- 
grims.  They  were  a  religious  and  moral  people,  who 
left  their  native  country,  because  they  were  not  per- 
mitted to  worship  God  in  the  manner  they  believed  to 
be  agreeable  to  his  will. 

CD 

4.  The  Pil^ims  suffered  much  from  the  hostilities  of  the  natively 
and  the  seventies  of  the  clhnate,  but  they  persevered  in  their  exertions 

a.  What  nation  colonized  New  York  1  —  Who  settled  New  Jersey  ? 

-Delaware?  —  Michigan,  and  Illinois  1     3.  Where,  and  at  what 

t?me,  did  the  first  white  inhabitants  of  New  England  land  1  —  What 

were  they  called?    4.  From  what  did  the  Pilgrims  suffer!    5.  When 


HISTORY    OF    TUB    UNITED    STATES. 


7n 


to  sottlc  t!>n  country.  They  foundcrl  ritios  and  towns,  rhurchrs  ami 
collcfies  ;  and  from  a  small  and  feeble  band,  liave  become  a  numerous 
and  important  people. 

5.  In  the  year  1682,  a  nunil)f  r  of  Friends,  or 
Quakers,  came  with  William  Pcnn  fromEnrrlaiul.  Tliey 
founded  the  city  of  Philadelphia,  and  settled  Pennsyl- 
vania;  which  became,  in  a  short  time,  one  of  the  ino^st 
flourishing  colonies  in  North  America. 


■William  Penn's  Treaty  with  the  Indians,  at  Philadelphia. 

6.  William  Penn  was  a  good  and  just  man.  He  ac- 
quired the  friendship  of  the  Indians,  formed  a  treaty 
with  them^  and  paid  them  for  the  lands  that  the  colonists 
occupied. 

7.  He  was,  in  consequence,  greatly  beloved  by  these  people.  They  re- 
spected his  memory  for  many  years  after  his  deaths  and  lived  in  peace 
and  harmony  for  a  long  time  with  the  inhabitants  of  Pennsylvania. 


did  William  Penn  come  from  England  ?    6.  What  was  William  Penn  1 
—  What  did  he  do  with  the  Indians?    7.  What  took  place  in  conse- 


PRIMARY    (iEOGRAPHV. 


♦  :'     *!!! 


8.  Canada,  and  nearly  tho  whole  of  what  is  now  British  America, 
was  first  settled  by,  and  remained  for  a  considerable  jwriod  in,  the 
possession  of  the  French ;  but  about  eighty  yearn  ugo^  it  was  con- 
quered by  the  English. 

0.  At  the  battle  of  Quebec,  fought  between  the  soldiers  of  these 
two  nations,  the  generals  of  both  armies  were  killed.  General  Wohi* 
was  the  English,  and  the  Marquis  Montcalm  the  French  commander. 


LESSON  40. 

HISTORY    OF   THE   UNITED   ST  A  TK  3- Tflntin  «  «rf. 

1.  The  British  Colonies,  now  the  United  States, 
though  much  smaller  seventy  years  ago  than  at  present, 
were,  however,  very  Jlourishing  and  prosperous.  George 
III.,  then  king  of*  Great  Britain,  unjustly  laid  a  tax 
upon  tea  and  various  other  articles  that  the  people  were  in 
the  Iiabit  of  obtaining  from  Europe. 

2.  The  payment  of  the  tax  being  resisted  by  the  American  people, 
they  were,  in  consequence,  called  rebels  by  the  British  government, 
andjleeta  and  armies  were  sent  froL.1  England  to  fight  against  them. 

3.  In  order  to  defend  themselves,  the  inhabitants  of  this  country 
raised  armies,  and  appointed  George  Washington  to  be  commander- 
in-chief,  with  Generals  Greene^  GateSy  Wayne^  Futnaw^  and  others^ 
under  him. 

4.  The  first  battle  was  fought  at  Lexington^  and  the  next  at  Bun- 
ker^s  Hill.  Though  the  Americans  were  unaccustomed  to  war,  and 
badly  armed,  yet  they  repulsed  many  of  the  bravest  soldiers  in  the 
king's  army,  commanded  by  some  of  h's  best  generals. 

quence?     8.  When  was  Canada  conquered  by  the  English?    9. 
What  took  place  at  the  battle  of  Q,ueb€c1 

(Questions.  —  1.  What  were  the  British  colonies  seventy  years 
ago  ?  —  Upon  what  did  the  king  of  England  lay  a  tax  ?  2.  What 
were  the  Americans  called?  —  What  were  sent  from  England  to 
fight  against  them  ?  3.  Who  was  appointed  commander-in-chief?  — 
Who  were  appointed   under  him?    i.  Where  were   liie  two  first 


HISTORY    OF    THE    AMERICAN    REVOLUTION. 


Surrender  of  the  Hessianf ,  at  Trenton. 

5.  General  Washington  afterwards  took  the  Hessians  prisoners  at 
TVentorif  and  Lord  Cornwallis  and  his  army  prisoners  at  Yorktown  ; 
and  at  length,  after  a  war  which  lasted  eight  years,  the  British  armies 
were  driven  from  the  country, 

6.  This  period  is  called  the  American  Revolution,  or  the  War  of 
the  Revolution.  In  that  contest,  Great  Britain  lost^ify  thousand 
soldiers,  and  spent  more  than  four  hundred  millions  of  dollars. 

7.  On  the  4th  of  July  1776,  Congress  declared  the 
country  free  and  independent^  under  the  title  of  United 
States  of  America.  It  is  in  remembrance  of  this  great 
national  event,  that  the  4th  of  July  is  celebrated  as  a 
holyday,  or  a  day  of  rejoicing. 

8.  Besides  the  gallant  patriots  who  fought  to  achieve  the  Indei^en- 
dence  of  our  country,  Franklin,  Jefferson,  Adams,  Hancock,  and 
many  others,  were  highly  distinguished  for  their  abilities  as  writers, 
orators,  and  statesmen. 

battles  fought  1  5.  What  did  General  Washington  dol  6.  What  is 
this  period  called  1  7.  What  was  done  on  the  4th  of  July  17761 
y.  Who  distinguished  themselves  as  statesmen,  &.c. 


76 


IMIIMAHY    CiKU(lllAI»HV. 


I'llV 


LESSON  41.  - 

♦  IfiaTOIlV    OF    TllSi    l/iVITKD   STATES,    ^c 

1.  Ill  the  year  1789,  General  Washington  was  elected 
tluj  first  President  of  tlie  United  States,  lie  performed 
tlie  duties  of  that  station  for  eight  year s^  and  then  retired 
to  his  residence,  at  Mount  Vernon^  where,  to  the  regret 
of  the  whole  nation,  he  shortly  afterwards  died. 


The  Wa!>hington  Faiaiiy. 

2.  This  grreat  man  is  called  the  Father  of  his  country^  because, 
by  his  skill  in  war,  he  secured  the  Independence  of  the  United  States ; 
and,  by  the  wisdom  of  his  government,  gained  for  his  native  land  the 
respect  of  foreign  nations.  / 

Questions.  —  1.  When  was  General  Washington  elected  presi- 
dent 1 —  How  lonfj  did  lie  prrform  the  duties  of  that  station?  — 
Where  did  he  die  J    2.  What  is  he  called?     3.  Name  the  presi- 


HlriiOllV    OF    TUB    UNITED    SrrATEH,    d;t 


T7 


o.  Tlie  presidents  who  huccceclt d  Cicncral  VV'iuliin^- 
loii  wore,  John  Adams^  Thomas  Jefferson^  James  Madi' 
souy  James  Monroe^  John  Quincy  AdamSy  Andrew  Jack' 
sonj  Martin  VafiBiircn^  Wm,ILIfarrison,andJohn  Tyler, 

4.  While  James  Madison  wns  president  of  the  United  States,  uuir 
was  dcrlartd  try  Conffresn  against  Great  liritain,  because  that  na- 
tion captured  our  vessels,  and  impressed  our  seamen. 

5.  This  second  contest  with  the  British  Kmpire  was  bej;jiin  in 
the  year  1812,  and  lasted  two  ,  ears  and  a  half:  many  battles  were 
fought,  and  some  brilliant  victories  gained,  botli  by  our  army  and 
navy. 

6.  Perry's  victory,  on  Lake  Erie;  JSVDonovgh's  victory,  on  Lake 
Champlain;  the  capture  of  Proctor^a  army^  in  Canada,  by  General 
Harrison,  and  the  victory  of  Neio  Orleans^  gained  by  General  Jack- 
son, were  the  most  striking  events  of  this  war. 

7.  Since  the  period  of  the  revolution,  the  United  States  have  become 
an  important  and  powerful  nation ;  the  States  have  increased  from 
thirteen  to  twenty-six^  and  the  inhabitants  are  live  times  more  nu- 
merous than  they  were  sixty  years  ago. 

8.  Since  the  year  1810,  the  people  of  Mexico,  Guatimala,  and  all 
the  territories  of  South  America  settled  by  the  Spaniards,  have  be- 
come free  from  the  control  of  the  Spanish  crown,  and  established 
Ilepublican  governments. 

9.  These  countries  were,  for  almost  three  hundred  years^  subject  to 
Spain,  and  governed  by  viceroys,  sent  from  that  country.  Brazil, 
which  belonged  to  Portugal,  has  become  an  Empire,  and  is  governed 
by  an  Emperor. 


dents  that  succeeded  General  Washington.  4.  What  took  place 
while  James  Madison  was  president  1  5.  When  was  this  war  com 
mencedl  6.  What  were  the  most  striking  events  of  this  war! 
7.  How  have  the  States  increased!  8.  Since  what  time  did  tho 
people  of  Mexico  become  free  from  the  control  of  the  Spanish  crown ! 
9.  How  long  were  these  countries  subject  to  Spain  1  —  What  has 
Urazil  become  ? 


78 


PRIMARY    GBOORAPHV. 


•  • 


LESSON  42. 


SOUTH    AMERICA. 


1.  South  America,  the  southern  division  of  the 
Western  Continent,  is  an  extensive  Peninsula^  united  to 
North  America  by  the  Isthmus  of  Darien. 

2.  It  is  famous  for  its  large  rivers^  high  mountains^ 
and  the  Abundance  of  its  goldy  silver,  and  diamonds. 

3.  The  Andes  is  the  most  extensive  range  of  moun- 
tains in  South  America.  Sorato  is  the  highest  peak  of 
the  Andes.  Cotopaxi  is  the  most  elevated  volcano  on 
the  globe. 

4.  The  Amazon,  La  Plata,  Orinoco,  and  St,  Francisco, 
are  the  chief  rivers  of  this  region.  The  Amazon  is, 
next  to  the  Mississippi,  the  largest  river  in  the  world, 
and  is  navigable  for  three  thousand  miles. 

5.  Coffee,  Sugar,  and  the  Chocolate-Nut,  with  Pine-apples,  Bana- 
nas, Oranges,  Lemons,  and  other  fruits,  are  raised  in  various  quar- 
ters. 

The  Milk-tree,  which  produces  a  liquid  similar  to  cows*  milk,  and 
the  various  trees  from  which  the  Indian-rubber,  or  gum-elastic,  is 
obtained,  abound  in  the  warmer  regions. 

6.  The  principal  beasts  are,  the  Jaguar,  or  American  Tiger,  the 
Puma,  Tapir,  Lama,  Great  Ant-cater,  and  Sloth.  Serpents  are  nu- 
merous, and  some  are  so  large  as  to  be  able  to  destroy  and  swallow 
deer,  and  other  animals. 


Q,uESTioN8. —  1.  What  is  South  America  1  —  By  what  is  it  united 
to  North  America?  2.  For  what  is  it  famous  1  3.  Which  is  the 
most  extensive  range  of  mountains  1  —  Which  is  the  highest  peak ! 
—  The  most  elevated  volcano  1  4.  Which  are  the  chiefrivers  1  5. 
What  are  raised  in  various  quarters  1    6.  Which  are  the  principal 


idl 


FDnil    A.MKUK  A. 


f) 


7.  The  liltf'd,  or  Aincrican  Ostrich,  and  thf  (\tiul>r,  mo  tlio  Iarj.MV't 
Amoricnn  birds:  bosidos  thesr  iIumo  is  an  almost  cndlfss  vaiirty  ot 
sinalier  kinds ;  Tuiicans,  ( ^hattrrrr.s  &<*. 

Of  the  beautiful  little  Hummlng-Dird,  thrro  aro  near  a  liMiidred  dif- 
frrcnt  species,  of  which  some  are  hardly  bigger  than  a  humble-bee. 


Toucan. 


Humniing-Bird. 


C'iiattrriir. 


The  Rhea  is  taller  than  a  man,  and  the  wings  of  the  Condor  are 
from  nine  to  twelve  feet  In  extent,  from  tip  to  tip.  The  Condor  gen&* 
rally  feeds  on  carrion ;  but,  impelled  by  hunger,  a  couple  of  these 
birds  have  been  known  to  attack,  and  destroy,  a  full-grown  ox. 

8.  The  inhabitants  of  South  America  comprise 
Whiles^  Indians^  and  Negroes.  The  latter  are  most 
numerous  in  Brazil,  where  they  are  held  as  slaves. 

9.  The  whites  are  chiefly  descendants  of  the  Span" 
lards  and  Portuguese,  and  speak  the  language  of  those 
nations. 

10.  South  America  includes  the  countries  of  New  Grenada,  Vene- 
zuclay  Ecuador^  Guianut  Brazil^  Peru^  Bolivia^  Chili^  Buenos  AyrtSf 
Paraguay t  Urxiguay^  and  the  Indian  territory  of  Patagonia, 

beasts  1  7.  Which  are  the  largest  birds ?  8.  What  do  the  inhabit- 
ants of  South  America  comprise"?  9.  What  are  the  whites  cl  iofly  ^ 
10.  What  countries  does  South  America  include  1 


No.    9.— MAP    OP   SOUTH    AMERICA. 


•  ' 


■■'« 


(80) 


MA1»    OF    SOUTH    AMBliiCA. 


81 


LESSON  43. 

No.  9  is  a  Map  of  South  America.  This  part  of  the  Western  Continent 
is  situated  to  the  southward  of  North  America.     It  is  also  smaller  in  exlciit. 

South  America  is  bounded,  on  the  north,  by  the  Caribbean  Sea ;  east,  by 
tlie  Atlantic  Ocean ;  and  west,  by  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It  ia  a  great  Penin- 
suiii,  surrounded  on  every  side  by  water,  except  where  the  Isthmus  of  Darion 
connects  it  with  North  America. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  the  Caribbean  Sea — Atlantic  Ocean  —  Pacific 
Ocean  —  Isthmus  of  Darien. 

Point  out  the  Amazon  River  —  R.  de  la  Plata  —  Orinoco  R.  —  R.  St. 
Francisco.  These  are  the  principal  rivers  of  South  America.  The  Amazon 
is,  next  to  the  Mississippi,  the  longest  river  in  the  world. 

Point  out  the  R,  Negro  —  R  Caqueta  —  Madeira  R.  —  Tapajos  R.  — 
Araguay  R.  —  Tocantins  R.  —  Paragutty  R.  —  Parana  R.  The  last  is 
called,  in  the  lower  part  of  its  course,  the  Rio  de  la  Plata. 

Point  out  Lake  Maracaybo  —  L.  Titicaca.  The  last  is  situated  among 
the  Andes,  at  an  elevation  of  more  than  two  miles  above  the  sea. 

Point  out  the  Andes  Mountains  —  Mount  Sorato  —  Mount  Cotojiaxi. 
The  Andes  extend  four  thousand  eight  hundred  miles  along  the  west  cou.^t 
of  South  America.  Mount  Sorato  is  the  highest  mountain  in  America.  It 
is  almost  five  miles  high.  Mount  Cotopaxi  is  the  highest  volcano  in  tiic 
world.    It  is  nearly  three  miles  and  a  half  high. 

Point  out  Cape  Oallinas  —  C  Horn  —  C  St.  Roque  [Rohe']  —  C  Blanco. 
These  are  the  most  northern,  southeroi  eastern,  and  western  points  of  South 
America. 

Point  out  the  Galapagos  Islands  —  Juan  Fernandez  Islands '-' I.  of 
Chiloe  —  Wellington  I.  —  Terra  dtl  Fuego  I.  —  Falkland  /•.  —  South 
Georgia  I.  —  St.  Catharina  I.  —  Joannes  I. 

Point  out  Brazil  —  New  Grenada  —  Venetuela  —  Ecuador  —  Peru  — 
Bolivia  —  Chili  [  She'-le^  —  Buenos  Ayres  —  Paraguay  —  Uruguay  —  P(.  - 
tagonia —  Guiana.  British  Guiana  is  represented,  on  the  Map,  by  the  lettc  r 
B ;  Dutch  Guiana  by  D ;  and  French  Guiana  by  P. 

Point  out  Rio  Janeiro  —  Bogota  —  Caraccas —  Quito  [Kf^-to]  —  Limu 
[Le'-rna]  —  Cusco  —  Chuquisaca  —  Santiago  —  Buenos  Ayres  —  Assump- 
tion —  Montevideo.  These  cities  are  the  capitals  of  the  South  American 
States.    Rio  Janeiro  is  the  largest  city  in  South  America. 

Point  out  Georgetown  —  Paramaribo  —  Cayenne.  These  are  the  capi- 
tals of  British,  Dutch,  and  French  Guiana. 


ii 


82 


PRIMARY    GCOGRAPHY. 


LESSON   44. 

NEW    GRENADA.    VENEZUELA,    Ac. 

1.  For  some  time  previous  to  the  year  1831,  New 
CtRENADA,  Venezuela,  and  Ecuador,  formed  the  Repub- 
lie  of  Colombia;  but  they  are  now  separate  stales. 
'V\my  contain  much  fertile  land,  and  abound  in  gold, 
iiilvcr,  and  precious  stones. 

2.  Ciuito,  Bocrota,  and  Caraccas,  are  the  capitals  of  these  countries, 
r'araccas  was  destroyed  by  an  earthquake,  in  the  year  1S12.  Jn  this 
awful  visitation,  the  strongest  buildings  were  overthrown,  and  the 
earth  opened,  and  swallowed  many  of  the  inhabitants.  The  city 
has  been  since  rebuilt. 


Caraccas  destroyed  by  an  Earthquake. 


3.  Guiana  is  a  fine,  fertile  region,  comprising  British 
Guiana^  Dutch  Guiana^  and  French   Guiana,     Sugar, 


QuEsi  IONS.  —  I.  What  did  New  Grenada,  Venezuela,  and  Ecividor 
form,  before  1831?    2.  When  was  Caraccas  destro^^ed?    3.  VVhul 


KRAZIL 


PERU. 


83 


coflt^c,  clove?,  and  Cayenne  pepper,  grow  here  abun- 
dantly. Georgetown,  Paramaribo,  and  Cayenne,  arc 
tlic  cbief  towns. 

4.  Brazil,  the  largest  division  of  South  America^  i-^ 
one  of  tbc  most  fertile  countries  in  tbe  world.  It  oncci 
belonged  to  Portugal,  but  it  now  forms  an  independent 
empire. 

5.  The  Erroator  part  of  tliis  country  is  covered  with  vast  forcsfs, 
which  abouiul  in  the  most  vahiahie  kinds  of  wood  :  Ilio  Janciio, 
Hahia,  and  Pernambiico,  are  tiie  chief  cities.  Rio  Janeiro  is  the 
ca{)ila],  and  the  largest  city  in  South  America. 

Cu  Sugar^  Coffee^  Cotton,  and  many  other  articles,  are  produced 
in  abundance.  Gold  mines  are  numerous,  and  diamonds  more 
plentiful  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  earth. 

7.  Peru  has  been  long  famous  for  its  mines  of  gold 


Silver  Mine  in  Peru. 


does  Guiana  comprise?  4.  What  is  Brazil?  5.  With  what  is  the 
greater  part  of  this  country  covered?  —  What  is  tiie  capital? 
6.  What  arc  produced  in  abundance?  —  What  are  numerous  and 
plentiful  ?    7.  For  what  has   Peru  been  long  famous  ?    8.  Wl'.at  is 


84 


PRIMARY    HKOGRArHY. 


and  silver,  which  have  produced  vast  wealth  ;  but  they 
are  not  so  rich  at  present  as  they  were  formerly. 

8.  On  the  coast  of  Peru  the  climate  is  hot,  and  rain  is  almost  un- 
icnown ;  among  the  mountains,  however,  the  weather  is  tcmperatr, 
(ind  sometimes  cold,  while  rain  is  abundant.  Peru  comprises  North 
Peru,  and  South  Peru.  Lima  and  Cuzco  are  the  capitals.  Arequipa 
is  one  of  the  chief  cities. 

9.  Bolivia,  formerly  called  Upper  Peru,  was  named 
after  General  Bolivar.  It  is,  for  the  most  part,  a  highly 
elevated  and  temperate  region.  The  people  raise  wheat, 
rye,  oats,  and  potatoes. 

10.  Mount  Sorato,  the  highest  mountain  in  America,  is  in  Bolivia : 
Chuquisaca  is  tiie  capital.  Potos;  is  one  of  the  chief  towns.  It 
stands  on  a  mountain  that  is  famous  for  the  vaH  quantities  of  silver 
it  has  produced. 


'^:ml 


,  i.t; 


LESSON  45. 

CHILI,   BUENOS   AYRES,    &c. 

1.  Chili  is  a  Jine^  fertile  country,  situated  between  the 
Andes  and  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Earthquakes  are  fre- 
quent, and  volcanoes  numerous  in  this  country. 

2.  Wheat  and  wine  are  the  chief  products.  Gold,  sil- 
ver, and  copper  mines  abound.  Santiago  is  the  capital 
of  Chili,  and  ValparaifO  the  chief  commercial  city. 

almost  unknown  on  the  coast  of  Peru  1  —  What  is  the  weather, 
among  the  mountains'?  —  What  does  Peru  comprise?  9.  After 
whom  was  Bolivia  named  1     10.  On  what  does  Potosi  stand  ? 

Questions. "—1.  What  is  Chili?  —  What  are  frequent  and  nume- 
rous?   2.  What  are  the  oJiief  products?  —  What  abound?    3.  On 


BUENOS    AYRES. 


85 


n 
O. 


.Somo  distance  westward  from  C'hili,  are  the  Juan  Fernarnhz 
islaiuls.  On  one  of  these,  Alexander  Selkirk,  a  Scotch  sailor,  resided 
hy  himself  for  several  years.  This  circumstance  is  suppoaed  to  have 
given  rise  to  the  well-known  story  of  Robinson  Crusoe. 


Alexander  Selkirk. 

4.  Buenos  Ayres  is  a  large,  but  thinly  settled  coun- 
try. It  consists,  for  the  most  part,  of  extensive  plains^ 
called  Pamjms,  on  which  numerous  herds  of  wild  norses 
and  cattle  feed. 

T).  The  inhabitants  catch  these  animals  by  skilfully  throwing  over 
thoin  a  lasfto,  or  leather  rope.  Beef,  without  bread  or  salt,  is  the 
chief  article  of  food  in  this  part  of  South  America,  and  is  so  cheap, 
that  it  is  often  sold  for  half  a  cent  a  pound. 

•  (3.  Horses  are  exceedingly  numerous;  and  a  good  one  may  be 
bouirht  for  a  very  small  sum.  Almost  every  person  rides  on  horse- 
back. Buenos  Ayres,  the  capital,  is  an  important  city.  The  ladies  of 
this  place  are  noted  for  their  beauty. 

what  islands  did  Alexander  Selkirk  reside  1  4.  Of  what  does  Buenos 
Ayres  consist  ?  5.  With  what  do  the  inhabitants  catch  these  ani- 
mals ?  —  What  is  the  chief  article  of  food?    6.  What  are  numerous  1 


86 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


7.  Paraguay  is  a  fine,  fertile  district,  situated  between 
the  Paraguay  and  Parana  rivers.  It  is  the  only  South 
American  State  that  is  destitute  of  a  sea-coast. 

Matt*,  or  Paraguay  Tea,  arrows  in  this  country.  It  is  an  herb  that 
is  used  over  a  great  part  of  South  America,  in  a  manner  similar  to 
the  tea  we  drink. 

8.  Uruguay,  like  Buenos  Ayres,  contains  extensive 
plains,  with  large  herds  of  cattle.  The  latter  furnish  an 
abundance  of  food  for  the  inhabitants. 


Method  of  carching  Cattle  on  the  Pampas  of  Buenos  Ayrea  and  Uruguay. 

9.  Tallow,  hides,  and  horns,  are  sent  in  considerable  quantities  to 
the  United  States,  a  ;i  ot-  er  countries.  Montevideo  is  the  capital  of 
Uruguay.  It  is  much  less  important  than  it  once  was,  having  suffered 
greatly  from  the  ravages  of  war. 

10.  Patagonia,  the  most  southern  division  of  South 
America,  is  a  cold,  barren  region.    It  is  inhabited  by 

—  For  what  are  the  ladies  of  Buenos  Ayres  noted  1    7.  Where  is 
Paraguay  situated  ?    8.  What  does  Uruguay  contain  1    9.  What  arc 


HISTORY    OF    SOUTH    AMERICA. 


8' 


various  tribes  of  savage  Indians,  who  have  been  lono 
reported  to  be  generally  taller  and  stouter  than  the  people 
of  other  countries. 

II.  Soutli  of  Patagonia  is  the  island  of  Terra  del  Fiiego,  or  land 
of  Jire.  It  is  inhabited  by  a  few  miserable  savages,  in  the  lowest 
state  of  wretchedness. 


LESSON  46. 

niSTORY    OF   SOUTH    AMERICA. 

1.  South  America  was  discovered  by  Columbus,  in 
the  year  1407,  during  his  third  voyage  to  the  New 
V^orld,  and  was  by  him  supposed  to  be  a  part  of  the 
ct^ast  of  Asia. 

2.  Peru  was,  at  that  time,  the  most  improved  of  all  the  Indian  >Slatctf. 
Its  kings,  called  Incas,  maintained  a  regular  government,  and  ruled 
over  their  subjects  with  mildness  and  justice.  The  latter  adored  the 
Incas,  regarded  them  as  a  sacred  race,  and  believed  them  to  be 
descendants  of  the  sun. 

3.  About  thirty  years  a.'ter  the  discovery  of  America,  Pizarro,  a 
brave  but  cruel  Spaniard,  invaded  Peru  with  a  small  army,  and  in  a 
tew  years  obtained  possession  of  tiie  whole  country. 

4.  In  order  the  more  readily  to  conquer  the  Peruvians,  Pizarro  in- 
vited the  Inca  to  a  feast,  treacherously  made  him  prisoner^  and  loaded 
iiim  with  chains. 


sent  to  the  United  States,  &c.]  10.  What  is  Patagonia  1  —  What 
are  the  inhabitants  of  Patagonia  reported  to  bet  U,  What  island 
lies  south  of  Patagonia  ? 

dcBSTioNS.  —  1.  When  was  South  America  discovered  ?  —  2.  What 
was  Peru  ?  —  What  were  its  kings  called  1  3.  Who  invaded  Peru  1 
4.  What  did  Pizarro  do  when  he  had  invited  the  Inca  to  a  feast  1 


■N  I 


88 


PRIMARY    oeOQItAPriY. 


Pitarro  and  the  laca. 

5.  To  regain  his  liberty,  the  Inca  offered  to  fill  the  room  in  which 
he,  was  conjlned,  as  high  as  he  coufd  reach^  with  vessels  of  gold.  This 
IMzarro  accepted ;  but  instead  of  releasing  his  prisoner,  he  cruelly 
put  hitn  to  death. 

G.  In  a  short  time  Spain  took  possession  of  the  northern  and  west- 
ern parts  of  South  America,  and  Portugal  of  the  eastern.    Atler 
being  badly  governed  for  almost  three  hundred  years,  the  Spanish 
colonies,  about  the  year  1810,  declared  themselves  independent ^  and, 
n  1821,  Brazil  became  independent  oi  Portugal. 

7.  To  maintain  their  authority,  the  Spaniards  sent  several  armies 
to  South  America^  which,  after  fighting  many  battles  with  the  colo- 
nists, were  finally  driven  from  the  country.  At  the  battle  of  Aya- 
chuco  [Ayd-ku-ko],  the  Colombians  and  Peruvians  totally  defeated 
the  last  Spanisli  army. 

8.  Among  the  eminent  men  who  became  celebrated  during  the 
contest  between  Spain  and  her  colonies,  Simon  BoLivui\  thejirst  Pre- 


5.  What  did  the  Inca  offer  t  6.  What  did  the  Spanish  colonists  do 
in  the  year  1810  ?  —  Of  what  power  did  Brazil  become  independent  * 
7.  Wliat  did  the  Spaniards  do  to  maintain  their  authority  ]  —  Where 


Kuaon:. 


81) 


mtlent  of  Cotonilnn,  cullcil  also  the  Lihrratctr,  was  the  most  ronspi- 

CUOUA. 


--^'^l*^ 


i  \%  -.ft 


V     General  BoUvar  entering  the  City  of  Lima  ai  Liberator. 

9.  This  distinguished  individual  has  been  called  the  Washii^glon 
of  South  America,  and  seems,  for  a  time,  to  have  almost  merited  that 
title;  but  his  attempts,  afterwards,  to  obtain  arbitrary  power,  and  to 
destroy  the  constitution  of  his  country,  place  him,  in  character,  fur 
beneath  the  pure  and  virtuous  patriot  of  North  America, 


LESSON  47. 


EUROPE. 


^  1 .  Europe  is  the  smallest  of  the  gravid  divisions  of  the. 
mrth  ;  yet  it  is  the  most  important  and  thickly  settled : 
thougli  only  one-fifth  the  extent  of  America,  it  contains 
more  than^re  times  as  many  inhabitants. 

was  the  last  Spanish  army  defeated  1    8.  Who  was  most  conspicuous 
In  this  contest  ?    9.  What  has  Bolivar  been  called  ? 

UcBPTioNs.  —  1.  What  is  Europe  ?  —  How  many  more  inhabitants 


€::''f 


ill 


$\ 


♦   »  , 


^>i 


'-!i 


\'  ':^ l\ 

-  ^ 


■'"X 


m 


90 


PRIMARY    GECXiRAPIIV. 


*-    !2.   The  Alps,  Apennines^  Pyrenees^  Carpathian,  and 
Diifrajicld,  arc  the  most  noted  mountmniL 

.'].  The  chief  rivers  arc,  the  Volga,  Danube,  Don, 
J)nivpcr,  Rhine,  and  Tagiis,  The  Thames,  in  England, 
and  the  Seine,  in  France,  though  both  sm:  ',  are  ini- 
j)ortant  and  well-known  rivers. 

4.  Wheats  Rye^  Barley^  and  Oata^  are  the  principal  kinds  of  grain 
liiisod  in  the  central  parts  of  Europe ;  and  indian-corn  and  Rice  In 
its  southern  regions :  in  tlie  latter,  Grapes^  ^g*>t  Orange*,  aixd 
Oliw'i},  grow  abundantly. 

Wine  is  made  from  Grapes,  and  sweet  oil  from  the  Olive.  Raisins 
are  dried  grapes.  Great  quantities  of  all  those  products  are  brought 
li  oni  France,  Spain,  Portugal,  and  Italy,  into  the  United  States. 


Orapc'9.  Figs.  lNive& 

5.  The  wild  animals  of  Europe  are  not  numerous.    Boars,  Wolves 
and  Wild  Boars,  are  found  in  some  parts,  anionsrst  tlie  mountains 

does  it  contain  than  America  1  2.  Name  the  most  noted  mountams. 
3.  Which  are  the  cliief  rivers  ?  4.  What  arc  the  principal  kinds  of 
grain  raised  in  Central  Europe?  —  In  its  southern  regions'  —  What 


EUROPE. 


01 


nnd  forests.  The  domestic  animals,  cattle,  sheep,  aiul  horses,  are 
abundant,  and  are  raised  in  great  perfection  in  England  and  Hol- 
land. 


English  Ox. 


Kiiglittli  Siiocp. 


C.  Manufactures  and  commerce  are  extensively  carried  on  by  the 
British^  French^  Dutch^  Belgians^  and  Priissians.  The  most  impor- 
tant European  States  are,  Great  Jintaui,  Prance,  Bussiat  Austria, 
and  Pruama.  These  are  called  tiic  five  great  powers. 

7.  Nearly  all  the  nations  of  Europe  speak  different  languajres,  and 
in  almost  every]  European  country  the  inhabitants  comprise  two 
classes,  the  nobility  and  the  common  people. 

8.  The  nobility  are  often  very  rich,  and  live  in  pomp  and  splendour^ 
while  the  common  people  work  very  hard,  and  can  obtain  only  the 
most  indifferent  food.  The  latter  enjoy  much  less  comfort  than  the 
poorest  inhabitants  of  the  United  States. 

9.  Europe  contains  sixty-one  different  States,  of  which  some  are 
very  small,  while  others  are  extensive  countries.  There  are  three 
Empires,  sixteen  Kingdoms,  and  nine  Republics.  The  others  are 
Duchies,  Principalities,  &c. 


grows  abundantly  in  the  latter  1  5.  What  are  the  wild  animals?  — 
Where  are  the  domestic  animals  raised  in  great  perfection  .'  (>.  By 
what  nations  are  manufactures  and  commerce  extensively  carried 
on  1  —  Name  the  most  important  nations.  7.  What  two  classes  do 
the  inhabitants  comprise  1  8.  How  do  the  nobility  live  ?  —  How  do 
the  common  people  worki  —  What  can  they  obtain  1  9.  What  does 
Europe  contain  ? 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


/. 


O 


^  >^ 


^ 


1.0 


I.I 


11.25 


2.5 


|2g 

1 


■  2.2 

^   %il    12.0 


•Htou 


6" 


o5fe 


^^3 


'S' 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporalion 


23  WIST  MAIN  STillT 

WiUTER,N.Y.  USaO 

(716)  t73-4S03 


d^> 
^\^ 

'^' 

V 


^ 


o^ 


No.   10.— MAP  OF    EUROPE 


J.  H.  Brif Mijr,  M. 


7 


MAP   OF   EUROPE. 


93 


1^ 


^ 


sft 


-P 


45 


LESSON  48. 

No.  10  is  a  Map  of  the  whole  of  Europe,  with  parta  of  Asia  and  Africa. 

Europe  is  the  smallest  division  of  the  Eastern  Continent.  It  is  bounded, 
on  the  north,  by  the  Northern  Ocean;  south,  by  the  Mediterranean  and 
Black  Seas ;  cast,  by  Asia ;  and  west,  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Point  out  the  Northern  Ocean  —  Mediterranean  Sea — Black  Sea  — 
Asia  —  Atlantic  Ocebn. 

The  Atlantic  Ocean  separates  Europe  from  America ;  the  Mediterranean 
Sea  separates  it  from  Africa ;  and  the  Black  Sea,  Don  River,  and  the  Ural 
Mountains,  separate  it  from  Asia. 

Point  out  the  Islands  of  Great  Britain  —  Ireland  —  Iceland  —  Nova 
Zembla  —  Majorca  —  Corsica  —  Sardinia  —  Sicily  —  Candia. 

Great  Britam  is  the  largest  island  belonging  to  Europe.  Iceland  is  the 
most  western,  and  the  nearest  to  America.  Nova  Zembla  is  the  most  north- 
ern.   Candia  is  the  most  southern  island. 

Point  out  the  Baltic  Sea  —  White  Sea  —  North  Sea  —  Irish  Sea  —  Sea 
of  Marmora  —  Sea  of  Azov. 

Point  out  the  Volga  River  —  Danube  R,  —  Don  R.  —  Dnieper  R, 
These  are  the  longest  rivers  in  Europe. 

Point  out  the  Alps  —  Pyrenees  —  Carpathian  Blountains  —  Balkan 
Mountains — Dofrajield  Mountains — Unu  Mountains.  The  Apennine 
Mountains  extend  through  Italy. 

Point  out  Norway  and  Sweden  —  Spain  and  Portugal  —  Italy  —  M^rea 
—  Crimea,  These  all  form  peninsulas.  The  chief  part  of  Denmark  also 
forms  a  peninsula,  called  Jutland:  it  may  be  seen  on  Map  No.  11. 

Point  out  the  Faroe  Islands  —  Loffoden  Islands  —  The  Malstrom.  The 
latter  is  a  frightful  whirlpool  in  the  sea ;  it  sometimes  engulfs  small  vessels, 
and  dashes  them  to  pieces.     Whales  have  been  also  drawn  into  its  vortex. 

Point  out  the  OtUf  of  Bothnia —  Chtlf  of  Finland  —  Bay  qf  Biscay^ 
Gulf  of  Venice,  The  Gulf  of  Venice  is  sometimes  called  the  Adriatic  Sea. 
The  Archipelago  is  a  sea  that  lies  to  the  eastwanl  of  Greece :  it  may  be  seen 
on  Map  No.  11. 

Point  out  the  Strait  of  Gibraltar.  This  strait  connects  the  Atlantic 
Ocean  with  the  Mediterranean  Sea.  It  is  fifteen  miles  wide,  and  separates 
Europe  from  Africa. 

Point  out  the  Arctic  Circle.  All  tliat  part  of  Europe  that  is  situated  to 
the  southward  of  this  circle,  is  in  the  North  Temperate  2^ne,  and  the  re- 
mainder is  in  the  North  Frigid  Zone. 


VM 


94 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


■  H 


r 


1  h'M 


il 


~v  '■] 


LESSON  49. 

SWEDEN    AND   NORWAY.   RUSSIA,  fce. 

J  1 .  Sweden  and  Norway  form  one  kingdom^  and  are 
governed  by  the  same  king.  These  countries  occupy 
part  of  the  most  northern^  and  coldest  regions  of  Europe, 

J  2.  Sweden  is  noted  fo?  its  mines  of  iron  and  copper^ 
find  Norway  for  its  trade  in  fshy  and  in  hoards j  plank, 
and  other  timber.  Stockholm,  in  Sweden,  is  the  capital 
of  the  kingdom. 

^  3.  Norway  is  inhabited  by  a  hardy  and  courageous  people^  some 
of  whom  live  to  a  great  age.  Many  parts  of  this  country  contain 
very  high  mountains ;  other  parts  are  covered  with  thick  forests,  in 
which  Bears  are  numerous :  jthese  are  often  killed  in  the  manner 
shown  in  the  picture. 


Norwefian  killiof  a  Bear 


Questions.  — 1.  What  do  Norway  and  Sweden  form?  — What 
do  they  occupy  ?    2.  For  wliat  is   Sweden  noted  1    3.  By  what  i«? 


LAPLAND RUSSIA. 


95 


4.  Sweden  was  once  an  important  kingdom,  and  has  produced 
some  eminent  men.  Gustavus  Adolphus,  who  lived  about  two  hun- 
dred  years  ago,  was  the  most  distinguished  monarch  of  his  time. 

i  5.  Lapland  is  a  cold^  barren  region^  inhabited  by  an 
ignorant  and  rude  race,  called  Laplanders.  They  arc 
greatly  attached  to  their  own  country^  and  think  it  tha 
finest  and  most  pleasant  in  the  world. 

'^  6.  These  people  have  large  herds  of  rein-deer^  the  milk  of  which 
forms  the  chief  part  of  their  food ;  and  of  the  skins  of  tliese  animals 
they  make  their  clothing.  In  winter,  the  Laplanders  travel  over  the 
ice  and  snow  in  little  sledges  4-  as  you  will  see  in  the  engraving. 


Laplaiidtn. 


*"  7.  The  Russian  Empire  is  the  largest  in  the  worlds 
though  it  does  not  contain  so  many  inhabitants  as  the 
Chinese  or  British  empire. 


Norway  inhabited  1  4.  What  has  Sweden  produced  1  5.  What  is 
Lapland  1  —  To  what  are  the  Laplanders  greaUy  attached  I 
6.  What  have  these  people  1    7.  What  is   the  Russian  empire? 


96 


I'lUMAIlY    GEOGIIAPHY. 


i   V' 


'« 


t  ;■ 


^  8.  Russia  in  Europe^  and  Russia  in  Asia^  are  the 
chief  divisions  of  the  empire.  The  Russian  Possessions 
in  America  are  of  less  importance. 

9.  The  people  of  Russia  consist  of  Russians,  Poles^ 
^    Tartars,  Finns,  Cossacks,  and  other  races.     The  Rus- 
sian army  is  larger  than  that  of  any  other  European  na- 
tion. It  amounts  to  almost  a  million  of  men. 

^  10.  Nearlj  ali  the  Russians  are  slaves  to  the  great  lords,  or  nobles: 
they  work  !iard,  and  are  often  ill  used  by  their  masters.  St.  Petcrs- 
burff  is  the  ca])ital  of  the  Russian  empire :  it  is  one  of  the  finest  citits 
in  the  world. 

\ 


Bet  real  of  the  French  from  Moscow. 

^  11.  Moscow,  the  ancient  capital,  was  set  on  fire  in  the  year  \%\% 
that  it  might  not  afford  shelter  to  the  army  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte, 
whose  soldiers,  in  the  retreat  from  Moscow,  were  nearly  all  li'ozeii 
to  death  by  the  intense  cold. 

8.  What  are  the  chief  divisions  of  the  empire  {  9.  Of  what  do  the 
people  consist  1  —  What  is  the  Russian  army  1  10.  What  are  nearly 
all  the  Russians ?  — What  is  St.  Petersburg?  11.  When  was  Mos- 
cow set  on  lire  ? 


;'*... .^ ^ ag<.fc!>'<£-fc.<a«y--:.'»*t(**ft iLTWdf ' atr^ -  -ii^'"**" 


eOLAUDy   DENMARK,   HOLLAND   AND    BELGIUM. 


97 


3an  nu- 


LESSON  50. 

POLAND,   DENMARK. HOLLAND   AND    BELGIUM. 

1.  Poland  is  inhabited  by  the  Poles^  a  brave  r.nd  gal- 
iiint  people/some  of  whom  now  live  in  the  United  States, 
where  they  are  called  the  Polish  exiles. 

2.  This  isa  very  large  country,  and  was  once  an  independent  king- 
doniy  but  it  has  been  conquered  by  the  Russians,  Austrians,  and 
Prussians.  The  largest  part  of  its  territory  now  belongs  to  Russia. 
Warsaw  is  the  chief  city,  and  was  once  the  Ciipital  of  Poland. 

Kosciusko  and  Pulaski,  both  distinguished  officers  in  the  American 
army  during  the  war  of  the  Revolution,  were  natives  of  Poland. 

3.  Denmark  is  a  levels  and  moderately  fertile  country. 
The  inhabitants  are  called  Danes :  they  are  a  quiet,  and 
industrious  people.    Copenhagen  is  the  capital. 

4.  Iceland  is  anisland,\which  is  situated  at  a  considerable  distance 
from  this  country/ and  forms  a  part  of  the  Danish  dominions.  It  is 
noted  for  its  volcano^  MourU  Heclat  and  the  Geysers,  or  hot  springs : 
the  latter  spout  up  hot  water  to  a  much  greater  height  than  the  highest 
houses. 

5.  Holland,  the  country  of  the  Dutch,  is  a  low  and  flat, 
but  well  cultivated  region :  many  parts  of  it  were  for- 
merly covered  by  the  sea.  It  is  famous  for  its  canals 
and  tvindmills. 


Questions. —  1.  Bv  whom  is  Poland  inhabited?  —  By  what  name 
are  those  called  that  live  in  the  United  States  1  2.  What  v^as  Poland 
once?  —  By  whom  was  it  conquered?  3.  What  is  Denmark?  — 
What  are  the  people  called?  4.  For  what  is  Iceland  noted?  5. 
What  is  Holland?  — For  what  is  it  famous?    6.  What  ure  the 

7 


98 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


■k 


m 


w 


"I 


V 


^  G.  TJie  Dutch  arc  great  gmokcrff,  and  arc  honest,  industrious,  and 
'^y        frugal.  Their  orchards  and  gardens  are  Icopt  in  the  neatest  manner. 
The  coinnirrce  of  Holland  is  very  great,  and  there  are  many  persona 
cngag'vl  ill  Jishiiig; 

^  7.  Amsterdam,  the  chxtj  city,  is  a  place  of  great  trade :  the  streets 
and  houses  are  l<opt  remarkably  clean.  A  town  called  the  Hague  is 
the  capital  of  Holland.  H'aarlem  contains  the  larg-e.ft  origan  in  t/ic 
Ivor  Id.  This  place  is  remarlvable  for  its  great  trade  in  Howes,  espe- 
cially tulips. 

^  8.  Belgium,  or  Flandrrs,  is  one  of  the  most  populous 
and  best  cultivated  countries  in  Europe,  It  has  long  been 
noted  for  its  various  manufactures. 

\,  9.  The  people  of  this  country  are  called  Bel^ans :  they  resemble 
the  Dutch,  but  speak  the  French  language.  Tiiere  are  many  schools 
in  this  country,  and  almost  every  one  can  read  and  write.  Brussels 
is  the  capital :  Antwerp  and  Ghent  are  important  cities. 

/  10.  A  number  of  famous  battles  have  been  fought,  at  various  times, 
in  Beigium ;  the  last  occurred  at  Waterloo,  in  the  year  1815^  In  this 
contest,  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  the  emperor  of  the  French,  was  de- 
feated, and  many  thousand  soldiers  were  killed  on  both  sides. 


LESSON  51. 

GREAT  BRITAIN,    ENGLAND,   WALES. 

1.  The  united  Kingdom  op  Great  Britain  and  Ire- 
land comprises  England^  Scotlandy  Ireland^  and  Wales : 
these  countries,  with  numerous  colonies  in  various  quar- 
ters of  the  earth,  form  the  British  Empire. 

Dutch  1  —  In  what  are  there  many  persons  engaged  1  7.  What  is 
Amsterdam  1  —  What  does  Haarlem  contain  1  8.  What  is  Belgium  J 
—  What  are  the  inhabitants  called  1  9.  What  language  do  the  Bel- 
gians speak?     10.  When  was  the  battle  of  Waterloo  fought? 

QcEsTioNs.  —  1.  What  does  the  United   Kingdom  comprise?  — 
What  do  these  countries,  &c.,  form  ?    2.  For  what  has  this  kingdom 


*-iijimi^ff^^"isi 


7 


GREAT    BRITAIN,    ENGLAND,    WALES. 


99 


2.  This  kingdom  has  been  long  noted  for  its  tocalth 
and  importance^  and  the  number  of  its  ships  of  war.  It 
contains,  including  the  whole  of  its  possessions,  near 
one-fifth  part  of  the  human  race. 

3.  The  inhabitants  consist  of  the  English,  Scotch, 
Welsh,  and  Irish.  The  three  first  arc  called  Britons . 
the  whole  are  called  tJie  British.  ]  The  chief  part  of  the 
people  of  these  nations  are  similar,  in  most  respects,  to 
ourselves. 

Nearly  all  the  first  settlers  of  the  United  States  came  from  Great 
Britain.  There  the  forefathers  of  Washington,  Jefferson,  Franklin, 
and  Adams,  lived  and  died. 


1^ 

i 

fm 

1 

'Bf^B       B         ^M          1     .^tfJ 

^^■^umvU^i^^Ph^I  ^flHu^/\41^P^P^B^  ''  lJ 

1 

1  ..  ""    . 

^^:^^<--    . 

pifw 

Coronation  of  Queen  Victoria. 


4,  The  British  empire  is  at  present  governed  by  Queen  Victoria : 
she  was  crowned  in  the  year  1838,  in  Westminster  Abbey,  in  the 
city  of  London.  This  ceremony,  called  the  Coronation,  was  con- 
ducted with  great  pomp  and  splendour. 


been  long  noted  ?    3.  What  are  the  inhabitants  called  ?  —  What  do 
they  include?     4.  By  whom  is  the  British  empire  now  governed' 


■m 


100 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPIIV. 


\/'  5.  England,  t?ie  most  southern  part  of  the  Island  of 
Great  Britain,  is  a  beautiful  and  interesting  region ;  tfie 
land  is  cultivated  with  great  care,  and  extensive  por- 
tions of  the  country  appear  hke  a  garden. 

^  6.  Vast  manvfacturcs  of  woollen^  cotton^  ailk^  iron^  gfass^  <^r.,  arc 
carried  on.  Canals  and  rail- roads  arc  numerous,  and  steam-ships 
sail  to  almost  every  part  of  the  earth. 

7.  In  England  there  arc  many  individuals  who  possess  large  for- 
tunes.  The  noble  and  the  rich  have  splendid  houses  and  country- 
seats,  elegant  coaches,  and  a  multitude  of  servants,  while  the  poor 
Jive  meanly,  and  often  suifer  much  distress. 

^  8.  London,  the  capital  of  the  British  empire,  is  the  largest  and 
most  wealthy  city  in  the  world ;  its  trade  extends  to  every  nuarter  of 
the  globe,  and  it  is  visited  by  numerous  individuals  from\our  own. 
■ai\d/fevery  other  civilized  country. 

/        9.  Manchester^  Liverpool^  Birmingham^  Lceds^  and  Bristol^  are 
^    important  cities :  Liverpool  and  Bristol  are  noted  for  commerce,  and 
the  others  for  manufactures. 

10.  Bath  is  the  most  elegant  city  in  England :  Cambridge  and  Ox- 
ford contain  celebrated  universities f  in  which  many  distinguished  men 
have  been  educated. 

11.  Wales  joins  England  on  the  west,  and  is  in- 
habited by  the  Welsh:  these  people  make  srca/  quantities 
of  flannel,  from  the  wool  furnished  by  tneir  numerous 
nocks  of  sheep.  Iron,  copper,  and  coal  mines,  abound 
in  this  country. 


5.  What  is  England  1  6.  What  are  carried  on  1  7.  What  do  many 
individuals  possess  ?  8.  What  is  London  ?  9.  Name  the  important 
cities.  10.  What  is  Bath  ?  —  What  do  Cambridge  and  Oxford  con- 
tain 1  1 1.  By  whom  is  Wales  inhabited  1  —  What  do  these  people 
make? 


"iTi-«ipi'»>(««,S»-iS^,  '"^nrm^:-^ 


SCOTLAND,    IRELAND,    ke. 


101 


LESSON  52. 

SCOTLAND.    IRELAND,   he. 


Slwpherdea,  Highland  Piper,  8otdl«r. 

^  1.  Scotland  is  situated  to  the  northward  of  England, 
and  is  divided,  by  the  Grampian  Hills,  into  the  High- 
lands and  Lowlands. 

2.  Like  the  inhabitants  of  New  England,  the  Scotch  are  religiour^ 
moral  and  industriov^.  The  churches  are  well  attended,  school?? 
are  numerous,  and  the  people  are  among  the  best  educated  in  tlm 
world. 

Bruce  and  Wallace,  Bums  and  Walter  Scott,  were  celebrated 
Scotchmen:  the  two  first  gallantly  defended  the  rights  of  their  coun- 
try ;  the  latter  distinguished  themselves  as  poets  and  writers. 

i/    3.  The  Highlands  is  a  rugged^  hilly  region :  the  inhabitants  speak 
a  peculiar  language,  and  wear  a  dress  different  from  that  of  any 


QiUESTioNs. —  1.  How  is  Scotland  divided?     2.  What  are  the 
Scotchi  — What  are  the  people^     3.  What  is  the  Highlands]  — 


102 


nilMAUY    GEOUUAI'HY. 


»  ,', 


♦  •« ',  I 


Ih 


1 5,; :, 


m 


*f 


other  nation.    Tho  Ilii^hlandors  raise  manij  sheep  and  cattle.    Tlie 
bagpipes  is  tiieir  favourite  musical  instrument. 

)/  4.  The  liOwlands  is  a  level  and  fertile  country,  and  more  tiiirkly 
settled.  Jvliiihurj;  and  Glasgow  are  the  principal  cities  In  Scotland  : 
Kdinhiir;:  is  noted  for  its  univentity,  which  is  attended  hy  a  greater 
number  of  students  than  any  other  university  In  the  w  rid. 

\J  5.  Ireland  is  a  fmc^  fertile  island^  situated  to  tho  wosf- 
wartl  of  Great  Britain.  Tlic  country  is  badly  governed^ 
and  the  iniiabitants  are  much  oppressed:  they  often 
sufler  for  want  of  food. 


J 


Irieli  Eiiiigranta  leaving  thoir  native  country  for  America. 

G.  The  people  of  Ireland  are  called  the  Irish :  numbers  of  them 
leave  their  native  country,  and  come  to  the  United  States,  where  they 
form,  in  many  places,  a  considerable  part  of  the  population.  Dublin 
and  Cork  arc  tlic  chief  cities  of  Ireland. 

General  Montgomery,  who  fell  at  (Quebec,  in  the  cause  of  American 
freedom,  as  well  as  many  other  gallant  patriots  who  adopted  our 


What  do  the  Hifrhlanders  raise  1    4.  What  is  the  Lowlands?  —  For 


what  is  Kdinburg  noted  J 


f). 


What  is  Ireland  ?  —  What  is  the  coun- 


try 1  —  WJmt  arc  the  iniiabitants  1    G.  What  do  many  of  the  people 


;:;? 


.«r-««M»(«-H*a«ai*is««;T*.  ^. 


mvtm*Ji»im- 


FKANCU. 


10:1 


country  as  their  home,  wcro  natives  r»l  In'i.ind,  or  thrir  drscrnd. 
ants. 

y  7.  FiiANCK  is  a  fjrrcat  and  powerful  kin^dom^  sopii 
rated  from  Kimland  hv  the  Straits  ot  Dovrr.  'i'lu;  coim 
try  is  beautiful  and  fertile:  it  is  faniou.s  for  its  wines 
/irandi/j  and  silk  goods. 


Interior  of  a  French  Caf(6,  (ColTee-houao.) 

,      8.  The  inhabitants  of  France  are  called  the  French.    TVieyoi':  very 

'  polite  and  gay  in  their  manners.    Dancing  is  a  favourite  amuse  iicnt, 

m  which  all  classes  of  the  people  excel.    There  are  many  learned 

men  in  this  country  ;|  but  numbers  of  the  poor  can  neither  read  nor 

write. 

France  is  the  native  land  of  La  Fayette,  and  other  pallant  French- 
men, who  assisted  the  United  States,  in  the  war  of  the  llevohition. 

9.  Paris,  the  capital,  is  one  of  the  finest  cities  in  the  world:  it  is 
much  visited  by  strangers  r^nany  Americans  are  always  to  be  found 
ihereJ   Lyons,  Marseilles,  and  Bourdeaux,  are  important  cities. 

do  1  7.  What  is  France?  —  For  what  is  it  famous  1  8.  What  is  said 
of  the  French  1  —  What  is  a  favourite  amusement  ?  —  Of  wiiat  class 
are  there  manv  1    9.  What  is  Paris  ? 


104 


PRIMARY    GBOGRAPHY. 


/   "!' 


', 


■^'^'■1 


LESSON  53. 

SPAIN.    PORTUGAL.    AND   GEVMANY. 

^  1.  Spain  is  ilic  country  of  the  Spamards :  though  now 
amongst  the  weakest,  it  was  once  the  most  important 
kingdom  in  Europe,  and  possessed  vast  territories  in 
North  and  South  America. 

V  2.  The  climate  is  pleasant,  and  the  soil  fertile,  but  badly  cultivated. 
Oranges^  Jfigs^  and  grapes^  grow  in  great  perfection.  There  are 
many  merino  f!hec;p^  from  which  the  finest  wool  in  Europe  is  obtained. 
Madrid  is  the  capital :  Barcelona  and  Seville  are  important  cities. 


Bull  Fight. 

/ 

3.  Bull  fights  are  a  favourite  amusement  in  Spain,  and  are  at- 
tended by  all  classes  of  the  inhabitants.  In  these  cruel  exhibitions, 
both  mm  and  horses  are  sometimes  killed  by  the  tortured  and  infu- 
riated bulls. 


1   !  h 


Q,rESTioN9.  —  1.  What  is  Spain  1    2.  What  grow  in  perfection  I  — 
Of  what  are  there  manyl    3.  What  are  a  fevourite  amusement  1 


'^'^nfRSSB 


PORTUGAL GERMANY. 


105 


'^  4.  Portugal  joins  Spain  on  the  west,  and  is  very  like 
that  country  in  its  climate  and  productions.  The  in- 
habitants are  called  the  Portuguese. 

5.  Both  these  kingdoms  are  bmUy  governed :  the  greater  part  of  the 
people  are  very  poor,  and  much  oppressed  by  the  rich.  Lisbon  is 
the  capital  of  Portugal:  Lisbon  wine  comes  from  this  city.  Oporto 
is  famous  for  its  trade  in  Port  wine. 

•  6.  Germany  is  inhabited  by  the  Germans:  it  is  an 
extensive  region,  including  Austria^  Prussia^  Bavaria, 
Hanover,  and  other  states :  these  amount,  altogether,  to 
thirty-nine  in  number,  and  form  the  Germanic  Confede- 
ration, 

*  7.  The  Germans  are  composed  of  various  nations, 
yet  they  all  speak  the  same  language.  They  are  an 
industrious  and  ingenious  people,  and  were  the  invent- 
ors of  printing,  watches,  and  globes, 

,'  8.  Universities,  schools,  and  learned  men,  are  numer- 
ous throughout  Germany,  and  many  of  the  inhabitants 
are  well  educated.  Music  and  dancing  are  favourite 
amusements  of  the  people. 

There  are  many  Germans  in  the  United  States,  where  they  arc 
much  respected  for  their  good  morals,  and  industrious  habits. 

The  Barons  De  Kalb  and  Steuben,  who  distinguishe^I  themsrlvrs 
in  the  American  army  during  our  revolutionary  war,  were  bot.'i 
Germans. 


4.  In  what  respect  is  Portugal  like  Spain?  —  What  are  the  inhabit- 
ants called]  5.  In  what  condition  are  both  these  kingdoms'  — 
What  is  Lisbon  1  6.  By  what  people  is  Germany  inhabited]  — 
What  does  it  include  ]  —  What  do  they  form  ]  7.  Of  what  were  the 
Germans  the  inventors  ]    8.  What  are  numerous  ]     9.  What  is  the 


>n 

i 

i 

f 

1 

.)«« 


.,  t^ 


106 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHV. 


^     9.  The  empire  of  Austria  is  the  largest  German  state. 

The  people  are  called  Austrians,     Prussia  is  the  cmm- 

try  of  the  Prussians,     Here  every  man  is  compelled  to 

serve  as  a  soldier  for  three  years. 

In  Prussia,  all  little  boys  and  girls  must  go  to  school  aftor  thpy 
Iiive  attained  a  certain  age:  tliis  is  the  law,  and  none  are  allowed  to 
i-i-Ay  at  home  during  school  hours. 

10.  Vienna  is  the  capital  of  Austria,  and  the  largest  city  in  Gcr- 
vunnj.  IJorlin  is  the  capital  of  Prussia.  Hamburg  is  the  chief  cow- 
inerrial  city  of  Germany:  it  carries  on  a  great  trade  with  England 
and  the  United  States. 


K^ 


LESSON  54. 

SWITZERLAND    AND    ITALY. 

1.  Switzerland,  the  country  of  the  Swiss,  is  a  re- 
public,  and  one  of  the  few  European  states  that  is  not 


Avalanche  in  Switzerland. 


pmpire  of  Austria !  —  What  are  the  people  called  1  —  What  is  Prus- 
sia 1  —  In  what  capacity  is  every  man  compelled  to  serve  1  10.  What 
is  Vienna  ?  —  Berlin  ?  —  Hamburg  1 

Questions.  —  1.   What   is   Switzerland?  —  Where  is  it  situated? 


SWITZ'-.ULAND    AM)    ITAI.V. 


107 


povcnici 


.y  an  cinpcror,  or  king  :  it  is  sjitiiatcd  innon^st 
the  A/jJs,  I  he  highest  mountains  in  Europe. 

•^      2.    Vtist  bodies  of  snnjp^  callrd  Avalanches^  sometimes  rush  down 

tho  lody  sides  of  the  Alps,  and  bury  the  towns  and  villages,  with 

their  inhabitants,  to  the  depth  of  many  leet. 
\]     ?}.  The  Swiss  are  an  honest,  bra  re,  and  industrious  people.     Tlie 

renowned  VViiiiam  Tell  was  a  native  of  Switzerland:   he  fouiiht 

bravely  against  the  enemies  of  his  country. 

4.  IJrrnc,  Zurich,  and  Lucerne,  are  each,  in  their  turn,  for  two 
years  at  a  time,  tl'ie  capital  of  Switzerland.  Geneva,  tiie  lai  jsest  city, 
is  remarkable  for  the  number  of  watches  made  in  it.  Tiie  lake  un 
which  Geneva  is  situated,  is  one  of  the  most  celebrated  in  Kuroj)e. 

The  Swiss  have  no  language  of  their  own :  the  French  is  spoken 
in  various  parts  of  the  country;  the  German  in  some,  and  the  Italian 
in  others. 


Italians  —  View  in  Rome. 


^  5.  Italy  is  the  most  fertile  and  pleasant  country  in  Fai 
rope:  it  is  unsurpassed  for  the  mildness  of  its  ehmate, 

2.  What  sometimes  rush  down  the  lofty  sides  of  the  Alps?  3.  What 
are  the  Swiss?  4.  What  cities  arc  each,  in  their  turn,  the  capital  of 
Switzerland  ?  —  For  what  is  Geneva  remarkable  ?    5.  What  is  Italy  ? 


108 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


^i»j  ii 


the  grandeur  of  its  mountains,  and  the  beauty  of  its 
lakes  and  plains. 

v  6.  The  inhabitants  are  called  Italians,  and  are  distinguished  for 
their  skill  in  music.  Many  of  them  are  amongst  the  finest  singers  in 
the  world.  The  most  celebrated  painters,  sculptors,  and  architects, 
have  been  natives  of  Italy. 

Painting  is  the  art  of  producing  beautiful  pictures.  The  sculptor 
carves  figures,  likenesses,  and  ornaments,  out  of  marble.  The  archi- 
tect builds  palaces,  churches,  and  other  edifices. 

yj  7.  Italy  includes  the  kingdom  of  Sardi7iiay  the  king- 
dom of  Lombard^  and  Venice^  and  the  kingdom  of  Na- 
ples ;  also  the  states  of  the  Church,  and  some  smaller 
territories. 

V  8.  Rome  is  the  most  celebrated  city  in  Italy ^  and  has  been  renowned 
in  history  for  more  than  two  thousand  years.  This  city  contains 
many  splendid  buildings ;  one  of  these,  St.  Peter's  church,  is  the 
largest  in  the  world. 

^  This  vast  edifice  was  one  hundred  and  eleven  years  in  building :  it 
is  near  five  hundred  feet  high,  and  about  half  a  mile  in  circumference. 

The  Vatican  is  an  immense  palace,  consisting  of  a  number  of 
different  buildings,  which  contain,  altogether,  between  four  and  five 
thousand  rooms. 

V  9.  Naples  is  the  largest  city  in  Italy,  and  Milan  the  most  elegant. 
Venice  is  built  on  seventy-two  islands:  here  they  have  canals  in- 
stead of  streets,  and  boats  in  place  of  carriages. 

V       10.  Genoa  is  the  birthplace  of  Columbus ^  and  Florence  of  Americxts 
Vespucius.    Turin  is  the  mast  regularly  built  of  all  the  Italian  cities. 


4tk 


6.  For  what  are  the  inhabitants  distinguished?  —  What  have  the 
most  celebrated  painters,  sculptors,  and  architects,  been  ?  7.  What 
does  Italy  include  1  8.  What  is  Rome  1  —  Which  is  the  largest 
church  in  the  world  1  9.  What  is  Naples  1  —  What  is  Milan  1  10.  Of 
whom  was  Genoa  the  birthplace  ?  ■—  Florence ?  —  What  is  Turin? 


••^""tm^ 


[.-.  .Ji,immummmmmmmm 


V.I«!^^^!«S! 


GREBCB. 


109 


LESSON  55.  ' 

IONIAN    REPUBLIC,   GREECE    AND   TURKEY. 

,  1 .  The  Ionian  Republic  comprises  several  small^  hut 
fertile  islands^  situated  on  the  west  coast  of  Greece.  This 
little  state  is  under  the  protection  of  Great  Britain. 

2.  The  inhabitants  are  chiefly  Greeks  and  Italians:  they  trade  in 
wine,  oil,  and  currants.    Zante  and  Corfu  arc  tlie  principal  towns. 

'     3.  Greece  is   inhabited  by  the  Greeks :  they  are  a 

brave  and  handsome  race  of  people,  and,  in  ancient 

times,  Avere  the  most  civilized  and  learned  nation  in  the 

world, 

^  4.  The  Greeks  were  latterly  subject  to  the  Turks,  for  more  than 
three  hundred  ymra ;  but,  after  fighting  many  battles,  they  have 
become  independent^  and  are  now  governed  by  their  own  king. 


BatUe  of  Navatino. 


Q,cESTioN8.  —  1.  What  does  the  Ionian  Republic  comprise  1 
2.  What  are  the  inhabitants  chiefly  1  3.  By  whom  is  Greece  in- 
habited]—  What  were  they  in  ancient  times?  4.  How  long  were 
they  subject  to  the  Turks )  —  What  have  they  become  ?    5.  When 


I 


lu- 


n  ; 


Ji    ;     , 


•ail 


f      v-f 


,' 


if 


!!1 


IIU 


IMUMAIIY    GBOOUAFIIY. 


V  5.  Tho  battio  of  Navarino,  fought  in  the  year  1827,  secured  the 
indepcntlcncr  of  (ri'ccce.  In  this  conflict,  the  allied  fleet  of  Englan  j, 
France,  and  llnssia,  destroyed  two  hundred  and  fourteen  vessela 
belon^niig  io  the  Turks  and  Egyptians. 

1/  6.  Athens,  tlie  capital  of  Greece,  is  one  of  the  oldeM  cities  in  the 
world:  it  was  the  bhliiplace  of  many  of  the  most  distinguished  men 
of  ancient  times.  The  ruins  of  some  of  the  most  celebrated  buildings 
ever  erected,  are  .slill  to  l)e  seen  in  Atiiens.  Napoli  andMissolonghi 
are  noted  towns. 


\y 


7.  Turkey,  or  the  Ottoman  Empire,  comprises 
Turkey  in  Europe^  and  Turkey  in  Asia,  The  inliabit- 
ants  are  called  Turks.  They  are  Mahomcdans^  and 
differ  greatly  from  Christians. 


\ 


Turkish  Car  —  Tark«,  and  Scenery  in  Turkey. 

8.  The  Turks  do  not  use  chairs,  but  sit  cross-legged,  on  cushioris, 
or  ciirpets :  tiicy  wear  turbans  instead  of  hats,  and  take  their  food 
with  tlieir  fingers,  without  knife  or  fork.    Among  these  people,  the 

was  the  battle  of  Navarino  fought  ?  —  What  did  that  conflict  secure? 
6.  What  is  Atliens !  —  Of  whom  was  it  the  birthplace?  7.  What 
does  Turkey  comprise  1  —  What  are  the  Turks  1    8.  How  do  they 


■m„m'"m '■K».*jiBi|t»ii.^«fflwttf  «.WK?/SK 


TURKEY. 


Ill 


rioh  are  allowed  to  have  several  tciveSf  none  of  whom,  accordhig  to 
ciLstom,  go  abroad  without  being  veiled.  The  poorer  class  have 
seldom  more  than  one  wife. 

9.  The  Turks  were  once  a  powerful  nation^  and  were 
dreaded  by  the  adjoining  states ;  but  they  are  now  o/' 
less  importance:  some  very  valuable  territories  have 
been  lately  conquered  from  them. 

10.  The  Sultan,  or  Emperor  of  Turkey,  wishes  his  subjects  to 

ndopt  Christian  customs  and  habits.  Considerable  changes  have 
already  taken  place  in  the  principles  of  the  government,  and  in  the 
manners  of  the  higher  classes  of  the  Turks. 

1  U.  Oonstantinople  is  the  capital  of  the  Turkish  empire.  The 
liouses  in  this  city  are  mostly  bunt  of  wood,  and  extensive  Jires  some- 
times take  place.  The  Mahomedan  places  of  worship,  or  mosques^ 
are  numerous,  and  some  of  them  are  very  fine  buildings.  The  most 
celebrated  of  these,  the  mosque  of  St.  Sophia,  was  once  a  Christian 
church. 


^  uorcQ 


MotqQe. 


sit!  —  What  are  the  rich  allowed  to  have?  9.  What  were  the 
Turks  oncel  —  What  are  they  now?  10.  What  does  the  Sultan 
wish  his  subjects  to  adopt?  11.  What  is  Constantinople?  —  What 
sometimes  takes  place  ?  —  What  are  Mahomedan  places  of  worship 
called? 

#  • 


B 


til 


No.  11  —  CENTRAL  AND  SOUTHERN  EUROPE. 


m 


;i^M 


(119) 


■nv/*  "»r.'\'M^.Hl  ts  ■',^~- 


■■i-^mm^^:- 


MAP    OF    CENTRAL    AND   SOUTHBRN    EUROPE. 


113 


3PE. 


40 


102 


I) 


LESSON  60. 

No.  11  is  a  Map  of  Central  and  Southern  Euirpc. 

Point  out  England  —  Scotland  —  Wales  —  Ireland.  The  three  fir.st 
occupy  the  Island  uf  Great  Britain.  The  whole  forms  the  united  kingduin 
of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 

Point  out  Austria  —  Prussia  —  Bavaria  —  Hanover  —  Saxorii/  —  Wir- 
temberg.     These,  are  the  principal  states  of  Germany. 

Point  out  Denmark  —  Holland  —  Belgium  —  France  —  Switzerland. 
These,  with  Great  Britain,  the  German  States,  and  the  western  purt  of 
Russia,  are  the  principal  countries  in  Central  Europe. 

Point  out  Spain  —  Portugal  —  Italy — Ionian  Islands  —  Greece  —  Tur- 
key.   These  occupy  Southern  Europe. 

Point  out  St.  Petersburg  —  Stockholm  —  Copenhagen.  These  are  the 
capitals  of  Russia,  Sweden  and  Norway,  and  Denmark. 

Point  out  London  —  Liverpool — Manchester — Edinburgh  [Ed'-in' 
bur-ro]  —  Glasgow  —  Dublin — Cork.  These  are  the  principal  cities  in 
Great  Britain  and  Ireland.     London  is  the  capital. 

Point  out  Paris  —  Lyons  —  Nantes  —  Bourdcaux  —  Marseilles.  These 
are  the  principal  cities  m  France.     Paris  is  the  capilul. 

Point  out  Madrid  —  Lisbon  —  Barcelona  —  Seville  —  Granada  —  Ca- 
diz  —  Oporto.    These  are  the  principal  cities  in  Spain  and  Portu^^al. 

Point  out  Vienna  —  Berlin  —  Hamburg  —  Amsterdam  —  Brussels  — 
Geneva.  These  are  the  chief  cities  in  Germany,  Holland,  Belgium,  and 
Switzerland. 

Point  out  Naples  —  Rome  —  Florence  —  Genoa  —  Turin  —  Milan  — 
Constantinople  —  Adrianople  —  Athens.  These  are  the  ciiief  cities  of  I  taly , 
Turkey,  and  Greece. 

Point  out  the  Vistula  —  Oder  —  Elbe  —  Rhine  —  Loire  —  Douro  — 
Tagus  —  Dniester  [iVees'-fer].  These  are  the  most  important  of  the  second- 
rate  rivers  of  Europe. 

Point  out  the  Shetland  Islands  —  Orkney  Islands  —  Hebrides^  or  WesH' 
ern  Islands.    These  belong  tO  Scotland. 

Point  out  Cape  dear  —  St.  George's  Channel —' English  Channel. 
The  narrowest  -,>art  of  the  English  Channel  is  called  the  Strait  of  Dover. 
It  separates  England  from  France. 

Point  out  Mont  Blanc  —  Mount  Etna.  The  first  is  the  highest  mountain 
in  Europe.  It  is  three  miles  high.  Mount  Etna  is  the  most  important  vol- 
cano :  it  is  about  two  miles  high. 

s 


114 


PEIMARV   OBOaaAPHV. 


^'M 


•'III 


LESSON  67. 

HISTORY   OF   EUROPE. 

^  1.  Europe,  it  is  supposed,  was  not  settled  at  so  early 
a  period  as  Asia  or  Africa:  these  two  divisions  con- 
tained powerful  empires  and  populous  cities,  while  the 
inhabitants  of  Europe  were  still  in  a  state  of  barbarism. 

/  2.  The  Greeks  were  the  ear  heat  European  people  of  whom  we  know 
any  thing  with  certainty.  They  lived,  at  first,  on  roota^  herbtt  and 
acornSf  and  sheltered  themselves  in  caves  and  hollow  trees. 

^     3.  About  3300  years  ago^  a  colony  of  Egyptians  settled  in  Greece, 
^   who,  in  a  short  time,  wrought  important  changes  among  the  rude 
inhabitants.    The  latter  soon  began  to  live  in  towns^  and  to  form 
regular  governments;  and  at  length  became  a  renowned  and  impor- 
tant nation. 


y' 


V:  ': 


4.  The  people  of  Greece  cultivated  learnings  and  the  sciences^  and 
acquired  great  skill  in  statuary^  paintings  and  other  arts.  They 
founded  beautiful  cities^  and  erected  splendid  temples,  of  which  some 
of  the  latter  remain  to  the  present  day. 

5.  The  Romans  became,  afterwards,  the  most  powerful  nation  in  the 
world :  they  extended  their  dominion  over  Greece,  and  many  ottier 
countries  in  Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa.  These  renowned  people  were, 
iiowever,  conquered  in  their  turn,  by  the  Goths,  and  Vandals,  and 
other  barbarous  nations,  who  destroyed  nearly  every  trace  of  learn- 
ing and  refinement. 

6.  For  several  hundred  years  after  the  downfall  of  the  Roman 
empire,  the  people  of  Europe  were  very  rude  and  ignorant,  but  in 


Questions.  —  1.  What  did  Asia  and  Africa  contain,  while  Europe 
was  still  in  a  state  of  barbarism  1  2.  What  were  the  Greeks  1^— On 
what  did  they  live  at  first!  3.  When  did  the  Egyptians  settle  in 
Greece  1  —  What  did  the  rude  inhabitants  soon  begin  to  do  1  4.  What 
did  the  people  of  Greece  cultivate  1  —  In  what  did  they  acquire  great 
sklin  —  What  did  they  found  an* erect?  5.  What  did  the  Romans 
afterwards  become  1  —  By  whom  were  they  conquered?    6.  What 


xMIBSMWH^a^S^SijNt.fcA-l^ji    ■•«■#,, 


^.^iin^^A  "iqi^airoaa*:* 


HISTORY    OF    BUROPB. 


115 


time  they  became  improved  and  civilized,  and,  with  their  descend- 
ants in  other  quarters,  they  now  comprise  the  most  cnHghttned  and 
powerful  nations  in  existence, 

7.  All  the  nations  of  Europe,  with  the  exception  of  the  Turks,  pro- 
fess the  Christian  religion :  they  are  better  educated,  antl  enjoy  a 
greater  share  of  freedom^  than  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  or  Africa. 

8.  To  Europe  the  world  is  indebted  for  many  of  the  most  useful 
inventions;  of  these,  the  art  cf  printing,  with  the  mariner^s  comjutsff, 
watches^  telescopes^  and  rail-roads,  arc  some  of  tlie  results  of  Euro- 
jiean  ingenuity. 

9.  Many  distinguished  men  have  lived  in  Europe  in  modern  times  : 
some  are  noted  for  their  learning,  some  for  the  useful  discoveries 
they  have  made,  and  others  for  their  abilities  as  statesmen  and 
warriors. 

10.  Among  the  latter  was  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  a  native  of  Corsica : 
he  became  emperor  of  the  French,  and  king  of  Italij^  and  was  tlie 
greatest  general  and  monarch  of  his  time. 


Bonaparte  at  the  head  of  hii  army. 


were  the  people  of  Europe  after  the  downfall  of  the  Roman  em- 
pire 1 —  What  do  they  now  comprise  ?  7.  What  do  the  nations  of 
Europe  profess?  —  What  do  they  enjoy  1  8.  What  are  some  of  the 
results  of  European  ingenuity  1  9.  Who  have  lived  in  Europe, 
&C.1     10.   What   did   Napoleon  Bonaparte  become]     11.    What 


I'RIMARY    GB(XiRAI*IIY. 


116 

11.  lionapartj^  raised  mif^hty  armies,  and  conqutrrd  iihinij  nations : 
ho  was  at  ia?>t,  liowfvor,  dcrcatril  at  tho  hutlie  of  Wuti'iioo,  nnd  was 
sent  as  a  prisoner  /o  the  inUmd  vf  St.  Jltlena,  wljerc  lie  died  in  thf 
year  Ib21,  after  u  residence  of  six  years. 


•  •  j' 


LESSON  58. 

ASIA. 

y  1.  Asia  is  the  largest  division  of  the  earthy  and  con- 
tains more  than  one  half  of  its  inhabitants.  It  coni|)rise8 
many  countries  and  nations,  with  extensive  ranges  of 
liigh  mountains,  and  numerous  rivers. 

2.  The  nations  of  Asia  are  often  called  Oriental  nations;  and  the 
manners  and  customs  of  the  people  are  called  Oriental  ui.inners  and 
customs.    Oriental  means  eastern. 

\/  3.  The  principal  mountains  of  Asia  are  the  Himma- 
leh :  these  are  the  highest  in  the  world.  The  others  are, 
the  Altay,  Thiaii'chan^  Caucasus,  and  Taurus  mountains. 

4.  The  chief  rivers  are  the  Kiang,  or  Yang-tse-kiang, 
Hoang'Ho,  Obe,  Lena,  Yenesei,  Cambodia,  Irrawaday, 
Ganges,  Indus,  and  Euphrates, 

5.  Asia  furnishes  tca^  su^ar^  coffee^  indigo^  pepper^  cinnamon^  and 
cotton y  besides  other  useful  products.  Gold,  and  diamonds^  and  pre- 
cious f'Lones  of  various  kinds,  are  found  in  this  quarter  of  the  world. 


did  he  do  1 — Where  was  he  sent  as  a  prisohoi*  ?  -  -  V/hen  did  he 
diel 

Q,uj:stion9.  —  I .  What  is  Asia  1  —  What  does  ii  cuntam  1  2.  What 
are  the  natives  of  Asia  often  called  1  —  What  does  oriental  meani 
3.  Whici)  are  the  principal  mountains?  4.  Which  are  the  principal 
rivers]    6.  Wi;c.t  does  Asia  furnish  1  —  What  are  found  1    d  Which 


ASIA.  117 

6.  The  principal  Asiatic  animals  arr,  ulei>fiant^,  both  tcild  and  tame, 
the  rhinoceros,  tiger^  leopard^  horae^  came!^  and  dromedary^  with  an- 
teiopes  of  different  fipfcies. 


Rhinncerof. 


Gazelli*. 


7.  The  gazelle  is  a  kind  of  antelope,  mm  h  admired  for  the  beatr 
of  its  eyes.  The  camel  and  dromedary  aro  am  mals  of  the  same  species 
the  former  has  two  humps  on  its  back,  and  t  le  other  has  but  one. 


Golden  Plicaaaiit. 


8.  The  cassowary,  cranes  of  various  kinds,  some  of  which  are  as 
tall  as  a  man,  the  wild  pea-fowl,  parrots  in  great  variety,  and  the 
most  splendid  |)^6a«an^«  in  the  world,  are  a  few  of  the  largest  Asiatic 
birds. 


a?*  tb#»  principal  Asiatic  animals  ?     7.  For  what  is  the  Gazelle  ad- 
mired '    8.  Which  are  the  largest  Asiatic  birds?    9.  Of  what  do 


•  I 
» 

t 

1 

♦  » 


!l 


k 


118  PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 

0.  The  people  of  Asia  differ  greatly  from  thoge  of  Europe  anu 
America.  Many  of  them  make  no  use  of  tables^  haves,  forks,  or 
plates,  at  their  meals :  they  sit  on  the  floor,  and  a  whole  family  will 
eat  their  victuals  out  of  a  large  wooden  bowl. 

10.  They  sloop  on  mats,  or  carpets,  and  do  not  undress  when  they 
lie  down  to  rest  at  night.  Many  of  the  inhabitants  wear  long  beards, 
and  shave  their  heads.  The  women  are  generally  ignorant,  and 
very  few  of  them  can  read  and  write. 

11.  The  principal  countries  in  Asia  are,  Asiatic 
Russia^  Turkey^  Arabia,  Persia,  Tartary,  India,  China, 
and  Japan, 


?;;  n 


im 


LESSON  59.* 

ASIATIC   RUSSIA,   TURKEY,    AND   SYRIA. 

WW  1^ 

j/     1.  Asiatic  Russia  is  an  immense  territory,  compris- 
'  ing  the  third  part  of  Asia.    It  includes  Siberia,  Circassia, 

and  some  otlier  countries,  and  extends  from  the  Ural 

mountains  to  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

^  2.  Siberia  occupies  the  most  northern  part  of  Asia :  it  is,  for  the 
most  part,  a  cold  and  sterile  region.  The  inhabitants  are  composed 
of  Russians,  with  Tartars,  TSmgouses,  and  other  barbarous  tribes, 

many  of  the  people  make  no  usel — On  what  do  they  siti  10.  On 
what  do  thoy  sleep  1  —  What  do  many  of  the  inhabitants  wear  1  — 
What  are  the  women  generally?  11.  Name  the  principal  countries 
in  Asia. 

Questions.  —  1.  What  does  Asiatic  Russia  comprise?  —  What  does 
it  include]    2.  What  is  Siberia?  —  What  are  the  inhabitants  com 

*  To  prepare  the  Pupils  to  answer  the  Questiorm  without  the  assintance  hitherto  rei>> 
dered  in  the  text,  the  use  of  the  Italic  type  will  be  gradually  discontinued  in  what 
follows,  and  in  a  few  oi  the  cloMing  Ajermom  altogether  otspemea  with. 


mmmm 


mm 


::.»!' y^.liil-'lfWI' 


r^mmtmmm 


CIRCASSIA TURKEY    IN    ASIA. 


119 


3.  Those  persons  who  hare  displeased  the  emperor  of  Russia,  or 
who  have  committed  certain  crimes,  are  exiled  to  this  country,  and 
are  never  permitted  to  see  tlieir  friends  ajrain. 

c/  4.  CiRCAssiA  is  a  country  situated  on  the  north  side 
of  the  Caucasus  mountains :  the  inhabitants  are  called 
Circassians :  they  arc  a  brave  and  handsome,  but  bar- 
barous race  of  people. 


-'"^^'^^i^^'  -^ 


^-  ^*^J^^^^ 


'^WiUP^ 


^^J^^  t 


■*•**»  ,^ 


5.  The  women  are  celebrated  for  their  beauty:  many  of  them  are 
sold  by  their  parents  to  traders,  who  dispose  of  them  to  the  Turks, 
Persians,  and  other  nations.  Some  of  these  women  become  the 
wives  of  kings  and  princes. 

/  6.  Turkey  in  Asia  forms  a  part  of  the  Ottoman^  or 
Turkish  Empire :  it  is  a  fine  fertile  region,  but  is  badly 
governed  and  cultivated. 


posed  ofl  3.  Who  are  exiled  to  Siberia?  4.  Where  is  Circaa- 
sia  situated  1  5.  For  what  are  the  women  celebrated  1  6.  Of  what 
does  Turkey  in  Asia  form  a  part?    7.  On  what  mountain  did  the 


120 


PRIMARY    CKOfillArHY. 


V  7.  Mount  Ararat,  on  whicli  the  ark  restod,  is  in  this  country  ;  an.) 
hero  Noah  and  his  posterity  settled,  after  the  tUjod.  This  part  ()t  Asiii 
is  iniiabited  Ijy  V'ar/t.s*,  Arabu,  Turcomans,  Armenians,  and  Kurds. 


' '  u 


••■*-  - •«-—  /•- ^l^ ...'.ft- 


[  8.  Smyrna,  Bagdad,  and  Bussorah,  are  the  principal  cities. 
Smyrna  is  noted  for  its  trade  in  figs,!  of  which  large  quantities  are 
brought  to  the  United  States. 

V  9.  Syria  long  formed  a  part  of  the  Turkish  domin- 
ions, but  it  now  belongs  to  Egypt.  It  was  renowned 
in  ancient  timesybr  its  commerce  aiid  riches, 

\i  10.  Tyre,  Baalbec,  and  Palmyra,  were  large  and  splendid  cities, 
of  which  nothing  remains  but  ruins.  Damascus  and  Aleppo  are  now 
the  chief  cities  of  Syria:  the  former  is  situated  in  a  rich  and  fertile 
district.  Aleppo,  in  the  year  1822,  was  nearly  all  destroyed  by  an 
cartljquukc ;  but  it  has  since  been  rebuilt. 


nrk  rest?  —  I3y  whom  is  this  part  of  Asia  inhabited?  8.  Which  are 
the  principal  cities?  —  For  what  is  Smyrna  noted  ?  9.  Of  what  did 
Syria  lon^  form  a  part?  —  For  what  was  it  renowned  in  ancient 
times  ?  10.  What  were  Tyre,  Baalbec,  and  Palmyra  ?  — Which  are 
now  the  chief  cities  ?  —  When  was  Aleppo  nearly  destroyed  ? 


§ 


PALESTINE,    ARABIA,    PERSIA,   &c. 


121 


LESSON  60. 

PALESTINE,    ARABIA.    PERSIA,  tec. 

^  1.  Palestine,  or  the  Holy  Land,  is  the  most  cotc- 
hrated  country  in  the  world :  it  was  long  inhabited  by 
the  Jews,  and  was  also  the  residence  of  our  Saviour 
Jesus  Christ, 

2.  In  this  part  of  Asia  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  fed  their  flocks, 
and  David  and  Solomon  reigned.  It  was  a  fertile  and  populous  ter- 
ritory ;  but  is  now  badly  governed,  and  badly  cultivated. 

,  3.  Jerusalem,  the  capital  of  Palestine,  has  been  renowned  for  thou- 
sands of  years :  it  is  much  inferior  to  what  it  was  in  ancient  times. 
Christians,  Jews,  and  Mahomedans,  regard  it  as  a  sacred  city. 

j  4.  Arabia  is  a  dry,  sandy  country,  poorly  supplied 
with  water.  The  people  are  called  Arabs :  they  live 
partly  in  towns^  and  partly  in  tents. 

5.  Those  who  live  in  tents  inhabit  the  desert,  and  are  called  Be- 
douins [Bed'- wins] :  they  raise  many  horses  and  camels,  and  often 
plunder  the  caravans  that  travel  through  their  country. 

The  Arabs  are  supposed  to  be  descended  from  Ishmael,  the  son  of 
Abraham  and  Hagar,  of  whom  we  read  in  the  Bible. 

• 

>  6.  Some  parts  of  Arabia  are  fertile,  and  produce  the  finest  coffee 
in  the  world.  Muscat,  Sana,  and  Mecca,  are  the  principal  towns : 
the  latter  is  visited  every  year  by  many  thousand  pilffrima. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Palestine  1  —  Who  resided  here  ?  2.  Who 
fod  their  flocks  1  —  Who  reigned  1  3.  How  long  has  Jerusalem  been 
renowned  1  —  What  do  Christians,  &c.  regard  it  ?  4.  What  is  Ara- 
bia ?  —  How  do  the  Arabs  live  1  5.  What  are  those  who  inhabit  the 
desert  called  1  —  What  do  the  Bedouins  often  do  J  G.  What  do  some 
parts  of  Arabia  produce  1  —  By  whom  is  Mecca  visited  every  year  1 


122 


riUMARY    GKOGKAPHY. 


\J  7.  Pkhsia,  tlic  country  of  the  Persians,  is  a  vcrij 
ancient  and  famous  empire :  it  is  badly  governed,  and  irf 
not  so  flonri.shini;  and  powerful  as  it  was  formerly. 

In  Iho  13iblr»  \vn  roa<l  of  Cyrus,  thefrirnfl  of  the  Jews,  and  of  Ahisn*^. 
rus,  wfjo  made  Estiior  Ins  quorn:  these  were  both  sovereigns  of  INmsj.i. 


rersians  — View  of  Ispahan. 

\/  8.  The  inhabitants  are  the  most  polite  and  learned  of  all  the  East- 
ern nations.  They  make  handsome  shawls,  carpets,  and  various 
articles  of  silk.  Teheran  is  the  capital:  Ispahan  and  Tabreez  arc 
the  chief  towns. 

9.  Afghanistan  [Afgan'-^-stan']  and  Beloochistan 
[I3elu-she-stan']  are  situated  immediately  east  of  Persia. 
The  people  of  Afghanistan  are  called  Afghans,  and 
those  of  Beloochistan  Belooches :  tliey  live  partly  in 
towns,  and  partly  in  tents. 

10.  Considerable  portions  of  these  countries  aie  barren  and  desert; 

yet  there  are  many  fertile  tracts,  on  which  Jine  peach es^  apricots^  and 
quinces  are  raised.    Cabul  and  Kelat  are  the  principal  cities. 

7.  What  is  Persia  ?  8.  What  are  the  inhabitants  1  —  What  do  they 
make  ?  0.  What  are  the  people  of  Afghanistan  called  1  —  Of  Beloo- 
chistan ?  10.  What  arc  considerable  portions  of  these  countries?  — 
What  are  raised  ? 


HI 


TARTARY,    ILDIA,    AND    IIINDOOSTAN, 


123 


LESSON  61. 

TARTARY.    INDIA.    AND    IIINDODST.W. 

1.  Tartary  is  an  extensive  re^^ion,  which  stretches 
from  the  Caspian  Sea  to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  It  com- 
prises Uvo  great  divisions,  Chinese  Tartary,  and  Inde- 
pendent Tartar  If, 

2.  Cliinose  Tartary  includes  Sonyt^ann^  Lifth'  Ihicharia,  Mon^n- 
I'm,  and  Mantchooria.  Indepondent  Tartary  includes  the  muntry  <>/ 
the  Kirguis  Tribes,  vith  Khiva  [Ke'-va],  Tarcinnuiiia,  fireat  liu- 
charia,  and  Khokan  [Ko'-kan].  The  cliicf  cities  are  DokJiara,  Klio- 
kan,  and  Samarcand. 

3.  The  people  of  Great  and  Little  Biicharia  and  Khokan  inhabit 
cities  and  towns;  but  nearly  all  the  otlier  Tartar  nations  live  in 
tents,  and  roam  from  place  to  place  with  their  camels,  horses,  and 
cattle. 


Turcomans  carrying  off  Persians  into  slavery. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  does  Tartary  comprise  1  2.  What  does  Chi- 
nese Tartary  include  ?  —  What  does  Independent  Tartary  include  1 
3.  What  do  the  people  of  Great  and  Little  Bucharia,  and  Khokan,  in- 
habit 7  —  What  do  nearly  all  the  other  Tartar  nations  live  in » 


^1 


i.i 


'•{r     ^I 


!;i :; 


•i  U  i; 


I  •: 


¥ 

^Ikv 

m 

t^^B< 

124 


PRIMARY    GEOGHArHY. 


4.  The  Turcomans,  who  live  on  tho  rastorn  shores  of  the  Caspian 
Sea,  oflrn  attack  and  plunder  the  towns  and  villages  of  the  J^craians, 
and  carry  off  and  sell  the  people  for  slacen. 

5.  Many  of  the  Tartars  eat  horse-flesh,  and  prefer  it  to  any  other: 
they  also  use  a  drink  called  koomis,  which  is  made  of  mares'  milk. 
Wild  liorses  aboiind  in  various  parts  of  Tartary :  they  are  liunted  hy 
the  inhabitants  for  food. 

V  6.  India  is  one  of  the  most  celebrated  countries  in  the 
world.  It  is  a  very  extensive  and  fertile  region.  Ilin- 
doostan^  Birmah,  Siam,  and  Anarn^  are  its  cliief  di- 
visions. 


,  Tiger  Hanting. 

V  7.  This  part  of  Asia  has  been  lonpr  noted  for  Ut  diamonds^  spices, 
and  cotton  goods.  The  elephant,  rhinoceros,  and  tiger,  are  found 
here :  the  last-mentioned  animal  is  the  most  ferocious  and  cruel 
the  world,  and  is  often  hunted  and  killed  by  men  riding  on  elephants 


m 


4.  What  do  the  Turcomans  oflen  dol  5.  What  do  many  of  the 
Tartars  eat  ?  --  What  do  they  drink  7  G.  What  is  India !  —  Name  its 
chief  divisions.  7.  ¥oy  what  has  this  part  of  Asia  been  long  noted  ] 
—  What  animals  are  found  here  ?    8.  To  whom  is  nearly  the  whole 


lURMAII,    duC.,    CHINA,    AND    JAI'AN. 


125 


^  8.  HiNDOosTAN  is  thc  country  of  the  Hindoos  :  it  is 
very  populous,  and  contains  many  diflcrcnt  states  :  these 
are  nearly  all  subject  to  Great  Britain,  and  lorni  that 
division  of  the  British  Empire  called  British  India. 

0.  Tlio  inhabitants  are  of  a  dark  complexion,  but  have  featurrs 
iiniilar  to  those  of  Europeana  and  Americans.  Thc  nativ"  princes 
are  called  Rajahs,  and  Nabobs:  they  live  luxuriously,  while  their 
people  often  i>erish  by  thousands,  for  want  of  lood. 

10.  The  Hindoos  are  divided  into  four  classes,  or  castes,  the  indi- 
viduals of  which  are  not  allowed  to  intermarry  with  one  another^  or 
to  tat  or  sleep  together.  The  missionaries  have  converted  many  of 
the  natives  to  the  Christian  religion. 

1 1.  Calcutta  is  the  capital  of  British  India.  In  this  city,  the  wealthy 
English  inhabitants  live  in  houses  that  rival  palaces  in  elegance  and 
extent.    Madras  and  Bombay  are  important  cities. 

The  Banyan,  or  Wonder  Tree,  grows  in  Hindoostan.  A  well- 
known  tree  of  this  species  has  upwards  of  three  thousand  depending 
branches,  that  have  taken  root  in  the  ground. 


Tho  Banyan  Tree. 


of  Hindoostan  subject  1  9.  Of  what  complexion  are  the  inhabitants ' 
—  To  whom  are  their  features  fjimilar  1  —  What  are  the  native  princes 
called!  10.  How  are  the  Hindoos  divided!  —  What  are  they  not 
allowed  to  dol  —  What  have  the  missionaries  donel  11.  What  is 
Calcutta  ?  —  What  do  the  wealthy  inhabitants  live  in  ? 


feti 


■■;t 


I 


i  il 


»' 


il 


f 


i  ■ 


>♦ 


'1 

•i' 


126 


PBIMAKT   GBOOBAPIIY. 


/ 


LESSON  62. 

DIRMAH,   &c.,   CHINA,    AND   JAPAN. 

\/'  1.  BiRMAH,  SiAM,  Anam,  and  Malacca,  are  countries 
which  form  tlie  eastern  part  of  Tndia.  These  are  weil- 
watered,  warm,  and  fertile  regions. 

2.  The  inhabitants  are  idolaters.  Almost  every  family  in  these 
countries,  as  well  as  in  China  and  Japan,  have  images  in  their  houses, 
which  they  worship  privately. 

3.  The  American  missionaries  have  converted  many  of  the  Bir- 
manSf  Karens^  and  other  racea^  to  the  faith  of  the  Gospel.  The 
people  of  Malacca  are  called  Malays,  and  are  mostly  pirates.  Ava  is 
the  capital  of  Birmah;  Bankok,  of  Siam;  and  Hue,  of  Anam. 

4.  The  Empire  of  China  is  very  extensive ;  it  con- 
tains many  large  cities  and  towns,  and  a  greater  popula- 
tion than  any  other  empire  in  the  world, 

\y  5.  The  inhabitants  of  this  country  are  called  the  Chinese :  they 
are  a  proudy  vain  people^  and  believe  all  other  nations  to  be  much 
inferior  to  themselves. 

6.  In  China,  very  small  feet  are  thought  to  be  the  chief  beauty  of  a 
woman.  The  poor  often  suffer  from  a  want  of  food,  and  eat  dogs, 
oats,  rats,  and  mice. 

7.  Besides  China  Proper,  the  Chinese  Empire  comprises  Thibet, 
Little  Bucharia,  Soongaria,  Mongolia,  Mantchooria,  and  Corea. 
Pekin  is  the  capital  of  the  Chinese  Empire.  Canton  is  the  chief  sea- 
port :  all  the  tea  that  we  use  comes  from  Canton. 

duESTioNs.  —  1.  What  do  Birmah,  &c.  formi  2.  What  are  the 
inhabitants  1  3.  What  have  the  American  missionaries  done  7  — 
What  are  the  people  of  Malacca  called  1  —  What  are  they  mostly  ? 
4.  What  does  the  empire  of  China  contain  1  5.  W  hat  are  the  Chi- 
nese ]  6.  What  is  thought  to  be  the  chief  beauty  of  the  women  1 
f ,  Besides  China  Proper,  what  does  the  Chinese  Empire  comprise "» 


(    I 


'iim;i:T 


nili    F.MrillK    Or     JAI'AN*. 


I  J 


8.  Tlio  fJroat  Wall,  iind  the  (iraml  runal,  aiv  notcil  works.  'lUt 
Porcelain  Tmnr  is  a  rcniarkaliU?  huililing.  Tua  is  the  itai'uia  shiiib 
that  grows  principally  in  this  country. 


Porcelain  Tower. 


Tea  riant. 


■'  9.  Thibet  is  a  cold  and  mountainous  country,  situ- 
ated between  India  and  China.  It  is  remarkable  for 
being  the  residence  of  the  Grand  Lama, 

10.  This  prince  is  the  sovereign  pontiff  of  the  Shaman  religion. 
Though  but  a  man,  his  followers  believe  that  he  is  God  himself,  in  a 
human  form,  and  that  he  never  dies.    Lassa  is  the  capital  of  Thibet. 

V,  11.  The  Empire  OF  Japan  consists  of  several  large 
and  populous  islands,  which  lie  eastward  of  China :  the 
soil  is  fertile,  and  well  cultivated. 

i/  12.  Manufactures  of  various  kinds  are  carried  on  by  the  Japanese. 
They  are  very  jealous  oi other  nations,  Sind  do  not  allow  any  but  tho 
people  of  China,  Corea,  and  the  Dutch,  to  trade  with  them.  Jedo, 
the  capital,  is  a  very  large  city. 

8.  For  what  is  China  noted]  —  What  is  a  remarkable  buil<'ing?  — 
What  is  tea  ?  9.  For  what  is  Thibet  remarkable  1  10.  What  do  the 
followers  of  the  Grand  Lama  believe  him  lobe?  11.  Ofwhnt  does 
the  Empire  of  Japan  consist  ?  12.  Of  whom  are  the  inhabitauls  jea- 
.ous? — Whomdotliey  allow  to  trade  with  theml 


J    i 


m 


1  .■  11 


■Hi 


1^.| 
■^■-f. 


■:  ili 

i^^^B 

■ ^^^^K 

1" 

ili 

'f'M 

w 

^!Oi1l  1 


1 

K, 

1     '  \-^ 

KJi 

I       '  V 

1 

|: 

m  :■ 

l|-    ,:• 

■;v 

ft" 

t« 

9'- 

: 

mA- 

IIj, 

No.   12.— MAP   OP   ASIA. 


(128) 


.,,i,^..,?5,^ 


^.i^-Ki^^-JS^.^'.^-^     .;$.' 


MAI'   OF    ASIA. 


LESSON  03. 

No.  12  is  a  Map  of  Asia.  This  division  of  the  Eastern  Continont  is 
hounded,  on  the  north,  by  the  Northern  Ocean  ;  louth,  by  the  Indian  Ocean ; 
eoHt,  by  the  Pacific  Ocean  ;  and  west,  by  Europe  and  Africa. 

l*oint  out  the  Northern  Ocean — Indian  Ocean  —  Pacific  Ocean  —  Ihi- 
rope  —  Africa  —  North  America. 

Point  out  tlie  Black  Sea  —  Red  Sea  —  Arabian  Sea  —  China  Sea  — 
Yellow  Sea  —  Sea  of  Ochotsk  —  Caspian  Sea  —  Sea  of  Aral.  Tiic  two 
la^t  are  interior  fcas,  and  are  not  connected  with  the  Ocean. 

Point  out  the  Persian  Gulf —  Bay  of  Bengal  —  Gulf  qf  Siam. 

Point  out  Bhering^s  Strait  —  Strait  of  Babelinandel  —  Isthmus  of  Suez. 
The  first  separates  Asia  and  North  America ;  the  second  separates  Asia  and 
Africa ;  the  third  is  the  neck  of  land  between  the  Mediterranean  and  Red  Sea. 

Point  out  the  Lena  River —  Yencsei  R.  —  Obe  R.  —  Irtysh  R.  —  V«/^« 
R.  —  Euphrates  R.  —  Indus  R.  —  Ganges  R.  —  Cambodia  R.  —  Yang- 
tse-Kian^  R.  —  IIoarig-Ho  R.  —  Amoor  R.  The  Yangtse-Kiang  is  tlic 
largest  river  in  Asia. 

Point  out  the  islands  of  New  Siberia  —  Laccadive  F.  —  MahJive  I'.  — 
Ceylon  —  Hainan  —  Formosa  —  Niphon  —  Jesso  —  Seghalicn.  Tiie  tlirue 
last  are  the  principal  islands  of  Japan. 

Point  out  the  peninsulas  of  Malacca  —  Corea  —  Kamtschatka.  The 
peninsula  of  Malacca  ia  separated  from  the  island  of  Sumatra  by  the  Strait 
of  Malacca. 

Point  out  Mount  Ararat —  Ural  M^'^  Allay  M^ —  Thian  Chan  M"  — 
Ilimmaleh  M^.  The  last  are  the  highest  mountains  in  the  world.  Some  of 
them  are  more  than  five  miles  high.  The  Caucasus  and  Taurus  M^*  may 
be  seen  on  Map  No.  11. 

Point  out  Siberia  —  Circassia  —  Turkey — Syria  —  Arabia  —  Persia  — 
Afghanistan  —  Beloochiatan  —  Independent  Tartary. 

Point  out  India  —  Hindoostan  —  birmah —  Siam  —  Anam  —  Ef/ipire  of 
Japan.    The  last  consists  entirely  of  Islands. 

Point  out  China  —  lAttle  Bucharia  —  Soongaria  —  Mongolia  —  Mnnt. 
chooria —  Thibet  —  Corea.    These  regions  form  the  Chinese  Empire. 

Point  out  Pekin  —  Jedo  —  Canton  —  Calcutta  —  Madras  —  Bombay  — 
Bankok^  and  Ava.     These  are  the  principal  cities  of  Asia. 

Point  out  Hue  —  Saigon  —  Cabul  —  Lassa  —  Teheran  —  Ispahan  — 
Bukhara  —  Khokan  —  Jerusalem  —  Mecca  —  Medina  —  Muscat  —  Astra^ 
chan  —  Tobolsk  —  Irkoutsk  —  Yakoutsk. 

9 


.  I 


m 


♦  : 


ill 


130 


PRIMARY    GROGRAPHY. 


,  I, 


f:   ;^^' 


LESSON  04. 

INHTOR  Y    OF    A8I  A. 

Tm:  history  of  Asia  is  iiijrhly  interostin^',  and  worthy  of  hcinfj 
sliidicd:  in  tliis  little  book  wo  can  only  mention  a  few  of  the  must 
remarkable  occurrences  which  have  taken  place  in  that  quarter  of 
the  earth. 

1.  The  history  of  Asia  begins  with  tlie  creation  of  th(»  worl.l. 
This  ev«'nt,  whi(;h  took  place  near  six  thousand  years  ago,  is  rrrordcd 
in  the  Holy  Scriptures.  There  we  may  also  read  the  account  of  our 
lirst  parents;  of  the  murder  of  Abel,  by  his  brotiier  Cain;  and  t)f 
Noah,  who  built  the  ark. 

2.  The  ark  was  a  great  ship,  in  which  Snah  and  hi.t  family  were 
saved  from  thejlood:  this  was  a  vast  deluge  of  water,  which  covered 
the  earth,  and  destroyed  all  living  creatures,  except  those  who  were 
saved  with  Noah.  The  flood  occurred  near  four  thousand  two  hun- 
dred years  ago. 


Building  the  Tower  of  Babel. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  does  the  history  of  Asia  begin  with  ?  —  When 
did  this  event  take  place  1  —  Of  what  may  we  also  read  an  account  ? 
2.  What  was  the  ark  ?  —  What  was  the  flood  ?  —  When  did  the  flood 


HiSTORt    OF    A.^^l  A, 


i:n 


3.  Abi»ut  .1  liiiinlr*"'!  ymrs  nftor  tlio  flcMHl.  th^  ^h^§t^^lm!tlH^^ "StmU 
\tC)i'dn  to  huild  t!ir  Towrr  of  Ikitirl,  which  thry  idtrndrd  mIuhiM  u'.irh 
tohr;»v«*n;  but  tho  Ahul«rhty  put  a  stop  t<i  itu-ir  (uohsh  tli'sitrn,  l»y 
coiilitiiiKhnp  thoir  lan^iiug<\  so  that  thoy  could  not  undrrstaiul  (»nf 
anollM  r. 

4.  Tljis  rirnimstancr  rausod  thrm  tn  srattt^r  ahriuni  info  rariott-n 
parfft  nf  tin'  earth.  Thf  children  of  Shorn  arc  siipposod  to  have 
M'tlled  Asia  ;  those  ofllam  to  have  settled  Africa  ;  and  the  posterity 
of  Japhcth  to  have  settled  Europe. 

T),  The  narratives  of  the  lives  of  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob;  of 
Samson  an<l  his  acts;  of  David,  who  killed  Goliath  ;  and  of  Daniel, 
who  was  cast  into  the  lions'  den,  are  all  portions  of  the  liistory  of 
Asia. 

6.  The  appearance  of  our  Saviour  Jesus  Christ,  elpliteen  hundi". 
and  forty  years  ago,  is  the  most  remarkahlc  event  recordedin  hittfrr 


Jcrusnicm  taken  by  the  Romans. 


occur  1  3.  What  did  the  descendants  of  Noah  bejrin  to  build,  &c. 
—  How  did  the  Almighty  stop  their  design  1  4.  What  did  this 
circumstance  cause  them  to  do?  — What  did  the  children  of  Sheni 
settle  1  —  The  children  of  Ham  1  —  The  posterity  of  Japheth  1 
5.  What  are  all  portions  of  the  history  of  Asial  6.  What  was  the 
appearance  of  our  Saviour  Jesus  Christ  1  —  Of  what  were  the 
inhabitants  of  the  earth  ignorant  1  —  What  had    they   become ' 


^  ♦ 


m 


..  ',t 


J-  i\ 


' 


132 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


At  that  time  the  inhabit.ints  of  tho  eartli  were  ignorant  of  true  reli- 
gion, and  had  become  very  wicked. 

7.  Christ  taught  mankind  to  worship  Gody  and  to  love  one  anotne?. 
He  showed  them  that  those  who  do  good,  and  act  justly,  will  enjoy 
everlasting  happiness  in  the  world  to  come;  while  th(jse  who  are 
wicked,  and  practise  sin,  will  be  wretched  and  miserable. 

8.  The  Redeemer  was  constantly  employed  in  performing-  acts  of 
charity  and  mercy ;  yet  he  was  barbarously  crucified  by  the  .fews: 
they  were,  in  consequence,  driven  from  their  own  country,  and  their 
chief  city,  Jerusalem,  was  taken  and  destroyed  by  the  Romans. 

9.  After  the  death  of  our  Saviour,  his  disciples  preached  the  gospel 
with  wonderful  success,  and  converted  multitudes  of  sinners. 
Though  opposed  and  persecuted,  they  established  the  Christian  faith 
in  various  parts  of  the  earth,  and  it  has  now  become  the  religion  of 
the  most  enlightened  nations. 


a  • 


ml 
1i 


LESSON  65. 

HISTORY   OF   ASW— Continued. 

1.  About  six  hundred  years  after  the  time  of  Christ,  the  impostor 
Mahomed  appeared  in  Arabia,  and  established  a  false  religion,  which 
has  been  adopted  by  the  Turks,  Arabs,  Persians,  Tartars,  and  other 
Oriental  nations. 

2.  Many  systems  of  religion  have  had  their  rise  in  this  quarter  of 
the  earth.  The  worshippers  of  Brahma,  in  Hindoostan ;  those  of 
Buddha,  in  Birmah ;  of  the  Grand  Lama,  in  Thibet  and  Tartary ;  and 
of  Fo,  in  China,  embrace  the  greater  part  of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia. 

3.  The  Hindoos,  who  worship  Brahma,  foolishly  believe  that  they 

7.  What  did  Christ  teach  mankind  1  8.  In  what  was  the  Redeemer 
constantly  employed  1  —  Who  crucified  him  1  —  What  were  they 
driven  from  1  9.  What  took  place  after  the  death  of  our  Saviour  ?  — 
What  did  his  disciples  establish  ? 

Questions.  —  1.  When  did  Mahomed  appear!  —  What  did  he 
establish  ?  2.  What  have  had  their  rise  in  this  quarter  of  the  earth  ? 
—  What  do  the  worshippers  of  these  systems  embrace!  3.  In  what 
way  do  the  Hindoos  believe  they  can    obtain   pardon  for  sin? 


■.■«f-«^'T-rr!««"-^  .r"-w.. 


HISTORY    OP    ASIA. 


133 


ac  rcli- 

notnei . 
II  enjoy 
j\\o  are 

acts  of 
»  Jews: 
nd  their 
ns. 

B  gospel 
sinners, 
ian  faith 
igion  of 


impostor 
n,  which 
nd  other 

mrter  of 
those  of 
ry ;  and 
of  Asia. 

hat  they 

ledeemer 
[ere  they 
riour  1  — 

did  he 
le  earth  I 
In  what 
I  for  sin? 


ran  only  n))tain  tlie  pardon  of  sin  by  the  performance  of  various 
cruel  practices,  alike  revolting  to  reason  and  liinnanity. 

4.  Some  seek  death  by  drowning;  some  are  crushed  beneath  the 
wheels  of  the  great  cars  on  which  their  idols  are  dragged  about;  and 
others  sleep  on  boards  set  full  of  sharp  nails.  Widows,  also,  burn 
themselves  with  the  bodies  of  their  deceased  husbands. 


Hindoo  Widow  perrorming  Uie  Suttee,  or  burning  herself  with  the  dead  Body 

of  her  Husband. 

5.  The  followers  of  Buddha  are  numerous  in  Birmah  and  Siam. 
They  build  spacious  temples,  most  of  which  contain  monstrous  idols: 
these  the  people  bow  down  to,  and  worship. 

6.  In  Asia,  at  an  early  period,  the  A.ssyrian,  the  Babylonian,  and 
the  Persian  empires,  successively  arose,  flourished,  and  decayed. 
In  later  times  the  Greeks,  and  afterwards  the  Romans,  exercised 
dominion  over  some  of  the  finest  portions  of  this  region. 

7.  About  twelve  hundred  years  ago,  the  Saracens,  or  Arabs,  began 
their  conquests,  and  obtained  possession  of  many  fruitful  countries. 
They  founded  an  extensive  empire,  and  were,  for  a  time,  an  import- 
ant and  powerful  nation. 


4.  How  do  some  seek  death  ?  —  In  what  way  are  some  crushed  1  — 
What  do  widows  do  1  5.  Where  are  the  followers  of  Buddha  nu- 
merous 1 —  What  do  they  build?  6.  What  empires  successively 
arose,  &c. !  —  What  nations  exercised  dominion,  &c.  ?  7.  When  did 
the  Saracens  begin  their  conquests?     8.  What  did  Jeniehis  Khan 


t 


^■*- 


134 


PRIMARY    r.EOGRAPHY. 


8.  At  a  I.ifor  prriod  Jcn?liis  Khan  [Jcnp'-is  Kan],  a  Tartar,  and 
nftorwards  T.imorlano,  a  Turkish  conqueror,  conimandrd  armies 
which  contained  liundreds  of  thousands  of  men.  They  fiul)dued 
many  natiojis  and  countries,  and  converted  some  of  the  finest  re- 
gions of  Asia  into  barren  wastes. 

9.  The  discovery  of  a  passage  to  India  around  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,  in  the  year  1498,  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  incidents  con- 
nected with  this  part  of  the  earth,  that  has  ever  occurred. 

10.  In  consequence  of  that  event,  the  boundaries  of  knowledge 
have  been  enlarged ;  commerce  has  jjeen  extended ;  and  civilized 
nations,  particularly  the  British,  have  acquired  great  power  and 
dominion. 

11.  Through  the  preaching  of  the  missionaries,  and  the  informa- 
tion spread  abroad  by  printed  books  and  newspapers,  important 
changes  are  taking  place  among  the  multitudes  that  inhabit  Asia. 

12.  The  religion  of  the  Saviour,  and  the  more  benevolent  customs 
of  Christian  society,  will,  no  doubt,  in  time,  be  substituted  for  the 
worship  of  false  gods,  and  the  cruel  rites  of  Paganism. 


LESSON  GO. 

AFRICA -nARBARY    AND   EGYPT. 

1.  Africa  is  a  great  peninsula,  which  is  joined  to 
Asia  by  the  Isthmus  of  Suez.  It  is  the  hottest,  and  the 
least  known,  division  of  the  earth. 

2.  The  chief  ranges  of  mountains  are  the  Atlas,  the 
Kong,  and  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon.     The  princi-pal 

and  Tamerlane  dol  —  Into  what  did  they  convert  some  of  the 
finest  regions]  9.  When  was  the  passage  to  India  discovered? 
10.  What  has  been  the  consequence  of  that  event?  11.  Through 
what  means  are  important  changes  taking  place  1  12.  What  will  be 
substituted  for  the  worship  of  false  gods,  &c.  1 
Questions.  — I.  What  is  Africa  1    2.  Name  the  chief  ranges  of 


AFIUCA 


BAKBART. 


135 


rivers  arc  the   Nile,  Niger,  Congo,  Coanza,  Orange, 
Zanibeze,  and  Senegal. 

:i  Though  a  larpe  portion  of  Africa  is  a  vast  desert,  yet  many 
parts  of  its  territory  are  very  fertile,  and  their  products  are  iii<:hly 
valuable.  The  cocoanut,  orange,  olive,  date,  pine-apple,  and  banana, 
arc  among  the  principal  fruits. 

Africa  produces  gold  and  ivory:  the  latter  is  the  substance  of  the 
tusk  of  the  elephant.  Combs,  knife  handles,  and  many  other  things, 
are  made  of  ivory. 


Hippopotamus. 


Ostrich. 


4.  The  elephant,  lion,  liippopotamus,  camelopard,  leopard,  ante- 
lope, orang-outang,  and  monkey,  beside  many  other  animals,  inhabit 
Africa.    The  African  ostrich  is  the  largest  bird  in  the  world. 

5.  The  inhabitants  are  mostly  of  the  negro,  or  black  race.  They 
are  very  ignorant,  and  are  often  at  war  with  each  other,  in  which 
those  that  are  conquered  are  made  slaves. 

t).  The  principal  countries  of  Africa  are  Barbary,  Egypt,  Nubia, 
Abyssinia,  Senegambia,  Guinea,  Cape  Colony,  Mozambique,  Zan- 
guebar,  and  Soudan. 


mountains.  —  Name  the  principal  rivers.  3.  Mention  some  of  the 
principal  fruits.  4.  Which  are  some  of  the  chief  animals  1  —  Which 
is  the  largest  bird  in  the  world  ?  6.  Of  what  race  are  most  of  the 
inhabitants  1    G.  Name  the  principal  countries  of  Africa.    7.  What 


■  ! 


■!':   't 


Ml 


A 


13G 


rillMARY    GEOGRArilY. 


7.  Barbary,  the  most  northern  part  of  Africa,  in- 
cludes llie  independent  states  of  Morocco,  Tunis,  and 
Tripoli,  and  the  French  Colony  of  Algiers. 

8.  These  countries  are  warm,  and,  for  the  most  part,  fruitful. 
Tlioy  aro  badly  fjovernod,  and  rudely  cultivated.  Morocco,  Algiers, 
Tunis,  and  Tripoli,  are  the  chief  cities. 


Nativps  of  Barbary. 


Moorish  Horsemen. 


9.  The  inhabitants  are  principally  Moors,  Berbers,  and  Arabs.  Tho 
Moors  reside  in  the  towns;  they  are  noted  for  their  skill  in  horse- 
manship.  The  Berbers  inhabit  the  Atlas  mountains.  The  Arabs 
live  in  tents,  and  possess  many  camels, 

10.  Egypt  is  the  most  celebrated  country  in  Africa. 
It  is  watered  by  the  river  Nile,  which  overflows  its 
banks  every  year,  and  renders  the  soil  very  productive 

is  Barbary  ?  —  What  does  it  include  1  8.  What  are  these  countries, 
&.C.  9.  What  arc  the  inhabitants  principally]  —  What  are  the 
Moors  noted  fori  —  What  do  the  Berbers  inhabit?  —  In  what  do 
the  Arabs  live  1     10.  What  is  Egypt  ?  —  What  is  it  watered  by  1 


NUniA,    SENEGAMBIA,    AND    GUINEA. 


13 


11.  This  country  is  fair.ous  for  its  pyramiils,  SjWhiix,  and  cata- 
combs: the  latter  an*  tombs,  in  which  mununics,  or  the  cnibahiicii 
bodies  of  the  ancient  inhabitants,  are  still  found. 

12.  Egypt  is  now  independent  of  Turkey.     Its  Pacha  [Pa-sliaW^, 
or  ruler,  has  a  powerful  army  and  navy.     He  has  esta!)lislied  sch.u)',^ 
and   manufactories,   but   iroverns  his   people   with   great   seventy 
Cairo  and  Alexandria  are  the  chief  cities. 


LESSON  67. 

NUBIA,   HENEGAMBIA,    AND   GUINEA. 

1.  Nubia  is  a  dry,  sandy  region,  situated  on  both 
sides  of  the  river  Nile.  It  was  once  a  populous  and 
important  country,  but  is  now  thinly  peopled. 

2.  The  remains  of  splendid  temples  are  common  in  Nubia.    They 
are,  for  the  most  part,  under  ground,  and  cut  out  of  the  solid  rock 
New  Dongola,  and  Kartoom,  are  the  chief  towns. 

3.  Abyssinia  is  a  territory  composed  of  ruc^ged 
mountains,  and  fertile  valleys.  It  now  comprises  three 
distinct  kingdoms,  or  territories. 

4.  The  inhabitants,  though  of  a  dark  complexion,  are  not  negroes. 
They  are  very  rude  and  brutal  in  their  manners.  At  their  feasts 
they  eat  raw  flesh,  streaming  with  blood,  cut  from  the  animal  while 
yet  warm.    Gondar  is  the  largest  city  of  Abyssinia. 

5.  The  Sahara,  or  Great  Desert,  is  a  vast  sandy 

1 1.  What  is  this  country  famous  for  1  12.  What  is  Egypt  independent 
ofl  —  What  has  the  Pacha  established] — How  does  he  govern  his 
people]  ', 

Q,uESTiOi^s.  —  1.  What  is  Nubia  1  2.  What  are  commoii  in  this 
country]  3.  What  is  Abyssinia  composed  of]  4.  What  are  the 
inhabitants]  —  At  their  feasts,  what  do  they  eat]    5.  What  is  the 


hV 


*      '1 


I 

•     lis 


i  ( 


I 

\ 


11^ 


mu 


m .. 


m 


'       •     !  'I 


'^;9iH 


i' 


138 


PUIMAUY    GEOGIIAIMIY. 


plain,  containing  a  few  fertile  spot?,  called  oases. 
These  arc  scattered  over  its  surface  at  ijrcat  distances 
from  each  other.     Fezzan  is  the  largest  oasis. 


A  Caravan  travelling  across  the  Great  Desert. 

6.  The  desert  can  be  crossed  only  by  caravans :  theso  are  com- 
posed of  traders,  with  horses  and  cameJs.  The  camels  carry  the 
merchandise;  also  food  and  water.  The  caravans  are  sometimes 
overwhelmed  by  clouds  of  sand,  which  are  raised  up  by  the  winds 
that  blow  over  the  desert. 

7.  Senegambia  is  inhabited  by  the  Foulahs,  JalofTs, 
Mandingoes,  and  other  negro  nations. 

8.  The  English,  French,  and  Portuguese,  have  some  small  colon ios 
on  the  coast.  Sierra  Leone,  an  English  colony,  is  the  largest  of 
these.  It  was  established  for  the  purpose  of  teaching  the  natives  to 
read  and  write,  and  instructing  them  in  the  Christian  religion. 

9.  Guinea  comprises  Liberia,  Ashantee,  Dahomey, 

Great  Desert  1  —  What  does  it  contain?  G.  How  can  the  desert  bo 
crossed  '  7.  What  nations  inhabit  Senegambia  ]  —  Who  have  settle- 
ments on  the  coast  ?  8.  Name  the  chief  of  these.  —  For  what  pur- 
pose was  it  estabjish.ed  ?    9.  What  does  Guinea  comprise  1  —  What 


..    .  irli»i>.i<iWi^..^?r,y. 


GUINEA. 


i;]!) 


Co!>go,  and  other  countries.  The  inhabitants,  hke  all 
the  native  Africans,  are  fond  of  music  and  dancing. 
They  play  on  various  rude  instruments. 


Musical  InstramenUi  of  the  Negroes. 

10.  Liberia  is  an  American  colony,  settled  in  the  year  1821,  and 
designed  as  an  asylum  for  the  free  coloured  population  of  tlie  United 
States.  It  is  a  fertile  country,  and  contains  about  5000  civilized  irj- 
habitants.  Monrovia,  the  chief  town,  was  named  after  James  Mon- 
roe, late  president  of  the  United  States. 

11.  AsHANTEE,  and  Dahomey,  are  countries  situated  near  Liberin, 
the  kings  of  which  are  so  cruel  as  to  sacrifice  hundreds  of  their  sub- 
jects at  a  time  to  the  spirits  of  their  ancestors. 

12.  Congo,  Angola,  and  Benguela,  are  principally  under  tiie  do- 
minion of  Portugal.  The  inhabitants  are  very  ijrnorant  and  indolent. 
The  slave  trade  is  carried  on  extensively  from  this  part  of  Africa. 


are  the  inhabitants  fond  ofl  10.  What  is  Liberia  1  —  In  what  year 
was  it  settled]  —  What  was  it  designed  for?  —  Who  was  Monro- 
via named  after?  M.  What  countries  are  situated  near  Liberia' 
12.  Under  what  domhiion  are  Conjro,  &c.  ? 


If 


m  1 


'if 

? 

"rf 

'■l!' 

'iHIx 

W'' 

! 

140 


rillMAIlY    GLOtiKAI'HY. 


Hi  I  111 


St    .,(, 


If 


i 


i  t 

r 


II 


1* 


LESSON  68. 

SOUTHERN    AFRICA,   ttc. 


1.  Southern  Africa  includes  nearly  all  that  part  of 
Africa  which  lies  south  of  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn. 
Tlie  inhabitants  arc  partly  of  white  and  partly  of  dark 
complexion. 


HottentotB  building  Huts,  and  loading  an  Ox  with  their  Utensils. 

2.  This  region  comprises  the  countries  inhabited  by  the  Hottentots 
and  the  Boshuanas,  with  Caffraria  and  the  Cape  Colony.  The  last 
was  once  u  Dutch,  but  is  now  a  British  colony, 

3.  Cape  Town,  the  capital,  is  the  largest  town  in  Africa  inhabited 
by  Europeans.  It  is  often  visited  by  vessels  going  to  and  from  the 
East  Indies. 

4.  Eastern  Africa  contains  Mozambique,  Zangue- 
bar,  and  Berbora,  with  several  other  countries. 


Questions. —  1.  What  does  Southern  Africa  include?  2.  What 
I'oes  this  resfion  comprise?  3.  Which  is  the  largest  town  in  Africa 
mliabited  by  I'.uropcuns?    4.  What  does  Eastern  Africa  contain? 


SOl'DAN ATKICAN    I.^LANDS. 


141 


5.  Mo7aml)iqiio  is  govrrnrd  by  the  IVn'tUfrucsc,  andZanpurharliy 
the  Arabs.  Beibora  is  inliabited  by  tlio  Soinaiilirs,  an  iiulustrit)us  and 
active  race.  Tliey    ^e  r.lniost  black,  but  are  dilForent  from  tiie  negroes. 

G.  Soudan  is  u  fertile  and  populous  region,  in  i\u) 
centre  of  Africa.  The  principal  kingdoms  arc  Bain- 
harra,  Iloussa,  and  Bomou. 

7.  The  inhabitants  of  Hoiissa  are  called  Fellatas.    They  are  th 
most  important  people  in  this  quarter,  and  have  conquered  several 
o(  the  neighbouring  countries.    Soccatoo,  Timbuctoo,  and  Sego,  arc 
the  chief  cities. 

On  the  map  you  will  find  that  a  number  of  islands  lie  on  both 
sides  of  Africa:  some  of  these  are  fertile  and  well  settled. 

8.  The  Azores  are  noted  for  oranges ;  Madeira,  for  wine ;  and  the 
Cape  Verde  Islands,  for  salt.  The.se  all  belong  to  Portugal.  The 
Canary  Islands  are  under  the  dominion  of  Spain  :  they  are  famous 
for  wine  and  Canary-birds. 

9.  St.  Helena  belongs  to  Great  Britain.  Here  the  emperor  of  the 
French,  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  resided  as  a  prisoner  for  six  years. 

10.  Madagascar,  the  largest  of  the  African  islands,  is  fruitful  and 
populous.  Many  of  the  inhabitants,  some  years  ago,  embraced  the 
Christian  faith.    They  have  been,  of  late,  greatly  persecuted. 

11.  Bourbon  Island  belongs  to  the  French,  and  the  Isle  of  Franco 
to  the  British :  they  both  produce  much  coffee  and  sugar.  The  Sey- 
chelle  and  Almirante  islands  also  belong  to  Great  Britain. 

12.  The  Comoro  islands  are  governed  by  their  own  chiefs.  Zan- 
zibar is  noted  for  sugar.    Socotra  produces  a  drug  called  Aloes. 

5.  By  whom  is  Mozambique  governed  1  —  Zanguebar  1  6.  What, 
and  where  is  Soudan  ?  —  Name  the  principal  kingdoms.  7.  What  are 
the  inhabitants  of  Houssa  called  1  8.  What  are  the  Azores  noted  for  J 
—  Madeira  1  —  Cape  Verde  Islands'?  —  Under  what  dominion  are 
the  Canary  islands  1  9.  To  what  power  does  St.  Helena  belong'?  — 
Who  resided  there  as  a  prisoner?  10.  What  is  Madagascar?  — 
What  did  many  of  the  inhabitants  embrace?  U.  To  whom  does 
Bourbon  Island  belong?  —  The  Isle  of  France? —  12.  By  whom  are 
the  Comoro  Islands  governed?  —  What  is  Zanzibar  noted  for?  — 
What  does  Socotra  produce  ? 


I  H 


J?'* 


m 


No.  18.— MAP    OP   AFRICA. 


(142) 


MAP   OF    AFRICA. 


143 


LESSON  69. 

Na  13  in  a  Map  of  Africa.  This  division  of  tho  Eastern  Continent  if 
bounded,  on  the  north,  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea;  east,  by  the  Red  Sea,  and 
the  Indian  O^can ;  west,  by  tho  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Point  out  the  Mediterranean  Sea  —  Red  Sea  —  Indian  Ocean  —  Atlanti 
Ocean, 

Point  out  the  preat  Desert  —  Desert  of  ChaUahengah.  The  Great  De- 
sert  is  three  thousand  miles  long,  and  a  thousand  wide.  Fexxan  —  Tuat  -^ 
Agdas  —  BUmah^  and  Tihetty^  are  the  largest  oases,  or  fertile  spots,  in  the 
Great  Desert.  The  four  last  are  represent^,  on  the  Map,  by  the  letters  T., 
A.,  B.,  T.    Tuat  lies  to  the  westward  of  Fezzan. 

Point  out  the  TtutrickB^  and  TihbooM,  These  are  the  principal  tribes  that 
inhabit  the  Great  Desert 

Point  out  Barbary  —  Egypt  —  Nubia  —  Ahynnnia  •—  Darfur  —  Soii- 
dan  —  Senegambia  —  Chiinea  —  Ethiopia  —  Cape  Colony  —  Caffraria  — 
Mozambique  {^Mo-zam-beek'']  —  Zanguebar  —  Berbora.  These  are  the 
principal  countries  in  Africa. 

i  oint  out  Liberia  —  Sierra  Leone  —  Athantee  —  Dahomey  —  Congo  — 
Angola, 

Point  out  the  River  Nile  —  Niger  R,  —  Congo  R.  —  Coanza  R.  — 
Orange  R,  —  Zambeze  R.  —  Senegal  R.  —  Lake  Tchad  — L.  Maravi. 

Point  out  the  Atlas  Mountains  —  Kot^  iU^—  Mountains  of  the  Moon~^ 
Snow  M^  —  Lupata  M^', 

Point  out  the  Azore  Islands  —  Madeira  /.—  Cape  Verde  f.  —  St.  Helena, 
These  islands  are  situated  in  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Point  out  Madagascar — Bourbon  I.  —  Isle  of  France  —  Comoro  I;  — 
Zfmzibar  —  Almirante  I'.  —  Seychelle  I*,  ISy'-shel]  —  Socotra.  These  are 
situated  in  the  Indian  Ocean. 

Point  out  the  hthmus  of  Suez  —  Strait  of  Gibraltar  —  Strait  qf  Babel' 
mandel  —  Channel  of  Mozambique* 

Point  out  Cairo  —  Morocco  —  Algiers  —  Tunis  —  TripAi,  The  four 
last  are  the  capitals  of  States  that  have  the  same  name. 

Point  out  New  Dongola  —  Kartoom  —  Oondat  ~-  Tirnhnctno  —  Se^o  — 
Monrovia  —  St.  Salvador  —  Cape  7\>ton.  The  last  is  the  largest  city  in 
Africa  inhabited  by  Christians. 

Point  out  the  Cave  of  Good  Hope  —  C  LaguUas —  C.  Guardqfui  [CSfor- 
dqf'toe^']  —  Cape  Verde,  The  three  last  are,  respectively,  the  most  soathen* 
eastern,  and  western  capes  of  Africa. 


i^ 


m 


\v 


:\i  :[ 


!  I' 

:  C 


yLiKtiilliLHt/ 


144 


riHMARV    GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  70. 


IIIPTORY    OF    AFRICA. 

1.  ArniCA  is  tho  least  civillzod  of  the  great  divisions  of  the  oaril 
The  chief  part  of  its  inhabitants  are  ignorant  of  boolcs  and  learn 
inp,  and  destitute  of  true  religion. 

2.  This  quarter  of  the  world  is  supposed  to  have  been  first  peoploJ 
by  the  descendants  of  Ham,  the  son  of  Noah.  About  three  thousaiul 
seven  hundred  years  ago,  they  founded  the  kingdom  of  Ethiopia 
This  state  existed  for  many  ages,  and  is  spoken  of  in  the  Bible. 

3.  Ancient  Egypt  was,  for  a  long  period,  the  most  renowned  coun- 
try In  the  world,  (or  knowledge  ami  science.  From  the  account  given 
of  it  by  Moses,  In  the  Scriptures,  it  appears  to  have  been,  in  his 
time,  a  well-regulated  and  flourishing  kingdom. 

4.  The  Bible  informs  us  of  varioas  circumstances  which  took  place 
in  Egypt;  particularly  of  Joseph  and  his  brethren,  and  of  Moses,  who 
was  hidden  among  the  bulrushes,  by  the  side  of  the  river  Nile.  It 
is  about  three  thousand  three  hundred  years  since  Moses  lived. 


lion  of  Pharaoh  and  his  Army. 


CluESTioNs.  —  1.  What  is  Africa?  —  What  are  the  greater  part  of 
its  inhabitants?  2.  Who  is  supposed  to  have  first  peopled  thi» 
quarter?  —  What  kingc  vn  w;is  founded  by  them?  3.  What  was 
ancient  Egypt ?  4.  Wl  at  does  the  Bible  inform  us  took  place  in 
Egypt  ?  —  Ho\i  many  years  is  it  '^ince  Moses  lived  ?    5.  Of  \\   at  else 


HISTORY    OF    AFIUCA. 


115 


5.  Tho  nrcount  of  the  doparturo  of  tlir  Israrlitos  from  F.pypt,  thiir 
passage  throiiph  the  Red  Sea,  nm!  tho  destriirtior.  ot  Pharaoh  and 
his  army  hy  its  waters,  are  also  mentioned  in  the  Scriptmes. 

0.  Tarthage,  before  the  time  of  our  Saviour,  rose,  hy  its  cr)nimerce, 
to  jireat  wealth  and  power.  It  carried  on  several  wars  against  the 
Romans,  which,  in  history,  are  called  Puric  M.irs.  The  city  ol  Car- 
thajre  was  destroyed  by  the  Romans,  and  has  never  been  rebuilt. 

7.  Resides  Carthage,  Egypt,  and  other  parts  of  northern  Africa, 
were  long  in  the  possession  of  the  Romans.  These  countries  were 
afterwards  conquered  by  the  Goths  and  Vandals,  and  also  by  the 
Saracens. 

8.  In  later  times,  the  Moors,  Algerines,  and  Tripolitans,  became 
notorious  pirates,  and  were  long  dreaded  by  the  neighbouring  ( 'hris- 
tian  nations.  Their  power  is  now  decayed,  and  they  arc  no  longei 
formidable. 


Battle  of  Algiera. 

0.  Algiers,  a  noted  piratical  state,  was  conquered  by  the  Frencl) 
in  the  year  1830,  when  ten  millions  of  dollars  in  money,  many  ships, 
and  a  large  supply  of  cannon,  were  captured. 

have  we  an  account  1  6.  What  did  Carthage  rise  to  1  —  Who  de- 
?*royed  Carthage  1  7.  What  countries  were  long  in  the  possession 
of  the  Romans  1 — By  whom  were  they  afterwards  conquered  1 
8.  What  did  the  Moors,  «Scc.  become?  —  What  is  said  of  their  power' 
0.  Who  conquered  Algiers  ?  —  In  what  vear  ?  —  ^Vhat  was  captured  ? 

10 


p 


■m: 


1  •■«  i, 


146 


PRIMARY    GBOGRAPHY. 


10.  Africa,  for  more  than  three  hundred  years  past,  has  furnished 
slaves  to  the  people  of  various  parts  of  the  earth.  Millions  of  these 
unhappy  beings  have  been  carried  away  from  their  country  and 
friends,  and  doomed  to  lai)orious  servitude  in  foreign  lands. 

11.  Several  of  the  inland  parts  of  Africa  have  been  visited  by 
Mungo  Park,  Captain  Clapperton,  the  brothers  Landers,  and  others. 

12.  These  travellers  have  given  to  the  world  some  account  of  tlx* 
inhabitants,  and  productions ;  still,  our  knowledge  of  Africa  is  im- 
perfect, and  chiefly  confined  to  the  countries  on  the  sea  coasts. 


rn] 


LESSON  71. 


OCEANICA. 


1.  OcEANicA  is  a  very  extensive  region.  It  comprises 
the  greater  part  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  with  the  numer- 
ous islands  that  are  scattered  over  its  surface.  Malay- 
sia, Australasia,  and  Polynesia,  are  the  chief  divisions. 

2.  A  few  of  these  islands  are  large  and  populous:  others  are  small, 
and  have  no  inhabitants.  Some  of  them  contain  lofty  mountains 
and  numerous  volcanoes :  the  latter  often  cause  dreadful  ravages. 

3.  Malaysia  includes  the  islands  of  Borneo,  Suma- 
tra, Java,  the  Philippine,  and  Mahicca,  or  Spice  Islands. 
These  produce  sugar,  coffee,  rice,  pepper,  cloves,  and 
nutmegs.     Gold  and  diamonds  abound  in  Borneo. 


iO.  How  long  has  Africa  furnished  slaves,  &-c.  ?  —  What  have  they 
been  doomed  tol  11.  Who  have  visited  several  of  the  inland  parts 
of  Africa]  12.  What  have  these  travellers  given  some  account  of  7  — 
What  is  our  knowledge  chiefly  confined  to  ] 

Questions.  —  1.  What  does  Oceanica  comprise  1  —  Which  are  its 
chief  divisions.  2.  What  are  a  few  of  those  islands  1  —  What  do 
some  of  them  contain  1    3.  What  does  Malaysia  include  1  —  What  do 


AUSTRALASIA. 


117 


4.  Batavia,  in  Java,  and  Manilla,  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  are  the 
chief  cities.  Java,  the  Spice  Islands,  and  parts  of  Sumatra  and  13<ir- 
neo,  belong  to  the  Dutch.  The  Philippine  Islands  are  held  by  tlie 
Spaniards. 

5.  The  inhabitants  of  Malaysia  and  Polynesia,  are  chiefly  of  the 
Malay,  or  brown  variety  Some  are  of  a  dark,  and  some  of  a  light- 
brown  complexion.    Others  are  almost  white. 


Malay  Tapir. 


BabyrouBsa  ling. 


G.  The  elephant,  tiger,  rhinoceros,  and  Malay  tapir,  abound  in 
Borneo,  Sumatra,  and  Java.  The  Babyroussa  hog  is  found  in  Java, 
and  the  ourang-outang  in  Borneo. 

7.  Australasia  comprises  the  islands  of  Australia, 
New  Guinea,  New  Zealand,  Van  Diemen's  Land,  and 
many  others.  Australia  is  the  largest  island  in  the 
world.  The  western  part  is  called  New  Holland,  and 
the  eastern  New  South  Wales. 

8.  The  native  inhabitants  of  Australasia  are  principally  Papuan,  or 
Oriental  negroes.  They  are  of  a  sooty-black  complexion,  with  woolly 
hair,  large  mouths  and  flat  noses.  The  English  inhabit  the  colonies 
in  Australia,  Van  Diemen's  Land,  and  New  Zealand. 


these  islands  produce?  4.  Which  are  its  chief  cities  1  5.  Of  what 
variety  chiefly  are  the  inhabitants?  6.  What  animals  abound  in 
Borneo,  &c.  1  —  Where  is  the  Babyroussa  hog  found  1  —  The  ourang- 
outang  1  7.  What  does  Australasia  comprise  1  —  What  are  the  west- 
ern and  eastern  narts  of  Australia  called  ]    8.  What  are  the  natives 


\M 


!|    !l 


i 


II 


148 


rTwIMARY    GEOGHAPHY. 


'fi 


9.  The  Kangaroo  is  the  largest  animal  found  in  Australia.  It  ilops 
not  run,  but  jumps,  fifty  or  sixty  feet  at  a  bound.  The  Blmeu  is  a 
bird  of  the  ostrich  species.  It  is  covered  with  hair,  instead  of  feu- 
thers.  The  Platypus  has  a  duck's  bill;  is  covered  with  hair;  and 
Jays  eggs. 


Kangaroo. 


Platypus. 


Emeu. 


10.  The  British  Colony  of  Botany  Bay  was  established  in  New 
South  Wales,  in  the  year  1787.  Those  persons  who  have  bee'n 
convicted  of  stealing,  and  other  crimes,  in  England,  are  sent  there, 
and  are  kept  at  hard  labour.    They  are  called  convicts. 

11.  Van  Diemen's  Land  is  also  a  convict  colony.  In  the  Swan 
River  and  South  Australian  colonies,  none  but  individuals  of  good 
character  are  allowed  to  settle.  Sydney,  in  New  South  Wales,  Ho- 
bart-town,  in  Van  Diemen's  Land,  and  Adelaide,  in  South  Australia, 
are  the  chief  towns. 

12.  The  Islands  op  New  Zealand  have  lately  become  a  British 
colony.  Many  English  emigrants  have  settled  in  them.  The  native 
inhabitants  are  an  active  and  warlike  race  of  sava'ges.  The  mission- 
aries have  converted  many  of  these  people,  and  established  schools 
amongst  them. 


of  Australia  principally  1  9.  Which  is  the  largest  animal?  10.  In 
what  year  was  Botany  Bay  colony  established  I  —  Who  are  sent 
there?  11,  What  is  Van  Diemen's  Land? — Where  is  it  that  indi- 
viduals of  good  character  only,  are  allowed  to  settle  ?  —  Which  are 
the  chief  towns?  12.  What  have  the  islands  of  New  Zealand  lately 
become  ?  —  What  are  the  native  inhabitants  ?  —  What  have  the  mis- 
sionaries done  ?  ? 


POLYNESIA. 


149 


LESSON  72. 


POLYNESIA. 


'      ^ 


1.  Polynesia  is  the  largest  division  of  Ocean ica.  It 
includes  a  great  number  of  small  islands.  The  Sand- 
wich, Society,  Friendly,  Caroline,  and  Ladronc  islands, 
are  the  principal.  •  , 

2.  The  bread-fruit,  cocoa-nut,  plantain,  and  taro-root,  furnish  the 
people  with  the  chief  part  of  their  food.  Of  the  bark  of  the  paper- 
mulberry  they  make  a  kind  of  clothing,  in  which  they  dress  them- 
selves. 

3.  The  inhabitants  of  Polynesia  are  called  South  Sea  Islanders. 
They  are,  in  general,  friendly  and  good-natured  to  those  who  visit 
them.    On  a  number  of  the  islands,  however,  the  people  are  still  very 

>e  vage  and  cruel  in  their  manners. 


Missionary  preachiog  to  the  South  Sea  Islanderd. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Polynesia?  —  What  islands  does  it  in- 
clude { —  Which  are  the  principal  islands  ]  2.  What  furnish  the  people 
with  the  chief  part  of  their  food  1    3.  What  are  the  inhabitants  of 


'i»l    il 


'M 
1-' 

;f 


m 


150 


PRIMARY    GBOGRArHY. 


4.  Some  eat  the  flesh  of  the  prisoners  they  take  In  their  wars : 
some  destroy  many  of  their  female  children,  and  put  to  death  num- 
bers of  their  fellow-beings  as  sacrifices  to  the  idols  they  worship. 

5.  The  missionaries,  both  American  and  Enghsh, 
within  the  k  i  twenty  years,  have  effected  great  changes 
among  the  South  Sea  Islanders. 

6.  The  people  of  the  Sandwich,  Society,  Austral,  Cook's,  ind  some 
other  islands,  now  profess  the  Christian  religion.  They  have  been 
taught  to  read  and  write  w^ith  facility,  and  to  conduct  themselves  with 
much  decency  and  propriety. 

7.  Honolulu,  on  one  of  the  Sandwich  islands,  is  the  largest  town 
in  Polynesia.  It  contains  about  five  thousand  inhabitants,  of  whom 
about  one  hundred  are  Americans  and  English,  who  are  chiefly  mer- 
chants. 

8.  The  Ladrone and  Caroline islandsbelong  to  Spain.  The  people 
of  the  Caroline  Islands  are  very  skilful  in  navigation.  The  Ladrone 
Islands  are  inhabited  mostly  by  Spaniards. 


w.^-s^;  -j^x. 


v^^ 


Prince  Le  Boo  leaving  bis  native  Island. 


Polynesia  called  1  —  What  are  they  in  general  ?  4.  What  do  some 
eat  1  —  Whom  do  they  put  to  death  1  5.  What  have  the  missionaries 
effected  \  6.  What  do  the  people  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  &c.  pro- 
fess?—What  have  they  been  taught?  7.  W^bich  is  the  largest 
town  in  Polynesia  ?    8.  To  what  power  do  the  Ladrone  and  Caro- 


.-»-..,*«»».,«»,>  * 


1»0LYNKS1A 


151 


9.  On  one  of  the  Pelew  islands,  many  yoiirs  nizo,  nn  Fnjxlish  ves.srl 
was  wrecked,  and  the  mariners  were  kindly  treated  by  the  iiih.ihil- 
ants.  On  tlie  departure  of  the  English,  the  kin^'  ot  the  island  sent 
his  son,  Prince  Le  Bo^,  with  them,  to  be  educated  in  Knjjland.  He 
died,  however,  in  a  short  time  after  his  arrival  in  that  country. 

10,  Occanica  is  the  latest  discovered  division  of  t!io 
earth.  The  Portuguese  hegan  to  explore  tue  >vcstern 
parts  of  this  region  a  short  time  after  the  discovery  of 
America  by  Columbus. 

11.  Magellan,  a  Portuguese  navigator,  in  the  years  1519,  1520,  and 
1521,  made  the  fhst  voyage  round  the  world.  He  is,  ».n  consequence, 
called  tlie  fiist  circumnavigator. 

12.  By  this  voyage  it  was  proved  that  America  is  separated  from 
Asia.  The  great  extent  of  the  Pacific  Ocean  was  also  ascertained. 
Since  that  time,  m^ny  Spanish,  Dutch,  French,  and  English  navi- 
gators, have  explored  various  parts  of  this  region. 

13.  Captain  James  Cook,  an  Englishman,  was  a  distinguished 
navigator.  He  made  more  discoveries,  and  told  more  about  the 
people,  and  the  different  things  that  grow  in  the  islands  of  Oceanica, 
than  any  other  individual. 

14.  Captain  Cook  was  killed  in  the  year  1779,  by  the  natives  of 
Owhyhee,  or  Hawaii,  one  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  in  attempting  to 
recover  a  boat  which  they  had  stolen  from  him. 

15.  All  parts  of  Oceanica  are  now  better  known;  and  many  Ameri- 
can whale  ships,  as  well  as  those  of  other  nations,  often  sail  among 
the  islands  of  Oceanica,  and  trade  with  the  natives. 


1.'  I' 


■i     ,:, 


ill 


>■■  !  (i 


n  'i, 


lino  islands  belong  1  9.  Who  was  sent  to  be  educated  in  England  ? 
10.  What  is  Oceanica?  —  When  did  the  Portuguese  begin  to  explore 
the  western  part  of  this  region  1  11.  When  did  Magellan  begin  his 
first  voyage  round  the  world  1  12.  What  was  proved  by  this  voy- 
age?—  What  has  been  done  since  that  time?  13.  Who  was  a  dis- 
tinguished navigator?  —  What  did  he  do?  14.  When  was  Captain 
Cook  killed  ?     1 5.  What  is  said  of  Oceanica  ? 


■  i 


•  I      ; 


'i 


i:^ 


< 

'I 


■ill 


;  ^f  i 


"Mi 


I 


It-  I'* 


I 

li 


152 


PKIMAUY    ObOGUAFHY 


No.   14.  — MAP   OF   OCEANICA. 


120 


l« 


MO 


»:« 


■rar 


140 


120 


100 


rn'f-*Vs^    ' 


Ilk.  \    '  • 


20 


10 


^■'<^'  -^^K^jows;. 


..^Slii  >  \ 


k'ltL^     1 


^ 


iangtiwU  Wat  from  H'aihinificn, 


157 


177 


m  143         123  103  to 


43 


=^=f 


ffon. 


10 


2C 


LESSON  73. 

No.  14  is  a  Map  of  Oceanica.  Near  two-thirds  of  this  part  of  the  earth 
belong  to  the  Western  Hemisphere,  and  the  rest  to  the  Eastern.  It  is  the 
lurgfest  division  of  the  globe,  and  comprises  about  a  third  part  of  its  surface. 
Only  the  one-fifteenth  part,  however,  of  Oceanica,  is  land ;  the  rest  is  water. 

Oceanica  is  situated  on  both  sides  of  the  Equator,  and  nearly  midway  be- 
tween the  North  and  South  Poles.  America  lies  to  tlie  east,  and  Asia  to 
the  west. 

Point  out,  on  the  Map,  Malaysia.  This  is  the  smallest  division  of  Ocea- 
nica ;  but  it  contains  the  chief  part  of  the  population.  Malaysia  is  named 
after  the  Malays,  who  form  a  large  oroDortion  of  the  inhabitants. 


MAP   OF    OCBANICA. 


153 


Point  out  Borneo  —  Sumatra  —  Java.  These  are  the  largest  fslandH  in 
Malaysia.  They  are  called  the  Sunda  Isles.  The  Dutch  possess  the  whole 
ut  Java,  and  also  parts  of  Borneo  and  Sumatra. 

Point  out  the  Philippine  Island*  —  Celebex — Spice  hlandi — Timor. 
The  Philippine  Islands  belong  to  Spain.  The  Spice,  also  called  the  Molucca 
Islands,  belong  to  the*  Dutch. 

Point  out  Manilla  —  Batavia.  These  are  the  principal  cities  in  Malaysia. 
Manilla  is  situated  on  Luzon  Island,  the  largest  of  the  Philippines. 

Point  out  Australasia.  This  division  contains  the  chief  part  of  the  land 
surface  of  Oceanica.  The  land  is  about  equal,  in  extent,  to  Europe,  but  the 
population  is  very  snmll. 

Point  out  Australia —  Van  Diemen^s  Land — New  Zealand — Norfolk 
I.  —  New  Guinea  —  New  Ireland  —  New  Hebrides  —  New  Caledonia. 

Australia  is  the  largest  island  on  the  globe.  The  western  part  is  called 
New  Holland,  and  the  eastern,  New  South  Wales. 

The  whole  of  the  inhabitants  of  Van  Diemen^s  Land  and  Norfolk  Island, 
are  of  white  complexion,  and  speak  the  English  language.  Part  of  the  in- 
habitants of  New  South  Wales,  and  a  few  in  New  Zealand,  are  also  English. 

Point  out  Sydney  —  Hobart  Town  —  Perth  —  Albany  —  Adelaide.  The 
two  first  are  the  chief  towns  in  Australasia. 

Point  out  Polynesia.  It  consists  entirely  of  islands,  and  is  the  larges* 
division  of  Oceanica.  It  contains,  however,  a  much  less  extent  of  land,  and 
a  smaller  number  of  inhabitants,  than  Malaysia,  or  Australasia. 

Point  out  the  Sandwich  Islands — Society  /«.  —  Ilervey's  I".  —  Austral 
P.  —  PitcairrCs  I.  The  people  of  all  these  islands  profess  the  Christian 
religion.  Pitcairn*s  Island  is  inhabited  by  the  descendants  of  the  mutineers 
of  the  English  ship  Bounty.    They  speak  the  English  language. 

Point  out  the  Pearl  /*.  —  Navigator's  /*.  —  Friendly  I'.  Some  of  the 
inhabitants  of  these  islands  have  been  converted  to  Christianity. 

Point  out  the  Ladrone  Islands  —  Caroline  I».  —  Pelew  I'.  —  Mulgrave 
F.  —  Central  Archipelago  —  America  I'.  —  Madison^s  h  The  Ladruiie 
Islands  belong  to  the  Spaniards. 

Point  out  the  Washington  P.  —  Marquesas  /».  —  Easter  I.  —  MagelUnis 
Archipelago  —  Anson^s  Archipelago,  The  two  last  are  the  most  nortiiern 
islands  of  Oceanica. 

Through  what  islands  does  the  equator  passl  —  Which  is  the  largest 
island  of  Oceanica  1  —  Which  is  the  most  eastern  island  1  —  Tiie  niob^ 
western  1 

Through  what  large  island  does  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn  pass  ? 

Through  what  Archipelago  docs  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  pass] 


tl 


I 


11 


«! 


Mi 
•'.\y  t. 


154  PRIMARY    GEOGRAI'HY. 


LESSON  74. 

PROGRESS   OF   SOCIETY. 

The  manner  in  which  the  various  races  of  men  live,  the  way  in 
which  thoy  are  governed,  and  the  reHgion  tliey  profess,  are  rimiiii- 
sfancos  of  great  importance.  These  exercise  a  powerful  infiuen<  o 
on  the  condition  and  happiness  of  nations,  and  are  worthy  of  bein^j 
understood  by  those  who  study  Geography. 

1.  Mankind  become  improved  by  gradual  steps.  In 
their  progress  from  the  lower  to  the  higher  stages  ot* 
society,  nations  may  be  classed  into  savage,  barbarous, 
half-civilized,  civilized,  and  enlightened. 

2.  Savages  are  those  who  reside  in  caves,  or  miser- 
able huts,  and  live  on  the  flesh  of  the  wild  animals  they 
kill  in  the  chase. 


Savage  Life.  — Indians  hunting  the  Buffalo. 


Qdestions. —  1.  What  is  said  of  mankind?  —  How  may  nations 
be  classed  1    2.  Who  are  savages  1     3.  What  is  said  of  this  class  1 


I'll  OGRESS    OF    SOCIKTV. 


3.  This  <'la.ss  of  m.inklnd  have  but  little  clothin;;,  and  many  of  Ihrni 
po  quite  nak«^(l.  They  are  ignorant  of  readinjr  and  writirijr,  and  are 
revcnL^pful  in  dispo:siti()n.  Savage  tribes  are  nearly  always  at  war 
with  one  another.  Home  savages  devour  the  enemies  tluT  kill  in 
battle. 

4.  A  considerable  part  of  the  Indians  of  both  North  and  Sontli 
Ameriea,  the  natives  of  Australia,  New  Guinea,  and  other  parts  of  the 
earth,  are  savages. 

5.  JJarbarous  nations  arc  rather  more  improved  than 
those  that  are  savage.  Like  them,  however,  they  are 
often  at  war  with  one  another,  and  make  slaves  of  their 
prisoners. 

6.  Some  barbarous  nations  live  in  tents,  and  others  in  small,  rude 
huts.  Some  have  many  horses  and  cattle,  and  others  possess  nu- 
merous camels,  on  the  mjlk  and  liesh  of  which  they  subsist. 


Barbarous  Life.  — Arab  Encampment. 

7.  Many  of  these  nations  cultivate  the  ground  to  a  limited  ex- 
tent.   They  make  coarse  clothing,  and  practise  a  few  simple  arts. 

4.  What  nations  are  savages  1  5.  What  are  barbarous  nations? 
6.  In  what  do  some  barbarous  nations  live?  7.  What  do  many  of 
these  nations  cultivate,  make,  and  practise  ?  —  What  nations  live  in  a 


I  t 


t .'  ; 


I  i.'f 


15G 


PRIMARY    GEOCIIAPHY. 


Tho  Arabs  f)f  the  Desort,  tho  WandoriuLT  Tiirtars,  rafTres,  and  va- 
rious other  African  nations,  live  in  a  l)arbar(tu.s  manner. 

8.  Tho  half-civilized  races  arc  the  Turks,  Persian?, 
Moors,  Hindoos,  Chinese,  Birmans,  and  Jaj)ancsc. 

9.  These  people  reside  in  cities  and  towns.  They  cultivate  the 
earth,  and  carry  on  certain  manufactures  with  a  considerable  (!«•- 
/rree  of  skill.  They  arc  not  utterly  destitute  of  learning,',  but  are 
ignorant  of  true  religion,  and  treat  their  women  as  slaves. 

10.  The  most  improved  races  of  men  are  the  civil- 
ized and  enlightened.  These  all  profess  the  Christian 
religion,  and  are  of  white  complexion. 

11.  They  are  much  superior,  in  learning  and  the  arts,  to  the  other 
races.  They  practise  the  art  of  printing,  and  carry  on  agriculture, 
manufactures  and  commerce,  to  a  great  extent. 

12.  The  ])rincipal  civilized  nations  are  the  Austrians,  Russians, 
Spaniards,  Portuguese,  and  the  people  of  South  America.  Though 
these  nations  possess  many  advantages  over  those  that  are  less 
Jmi)roved,  yet  among  them  the  great  body  of  the  people  are  but 
imperfectly  educated. 

13.  The  principal  enlightened  nations  are  the  United  States,  Great 
Britain,  France,  Holland,  Belgium,  Switzerland,  and  Prussia. 

14.  In  these  states,  colleges  and  schools  are  numerous,  and  almost 
every  person  can  read  and  write.  Bible  and  missionary  societies 
abound.  The  female  sex  is  honoured  and  respected.  All  persons 
may  worship  God  in  the  way  they  believe  to  be  agreeable  to  his  \\'ill. 


barbarous  manner?  8.  Which  are  the  half-civilized  races  1  9.  In 
what  do  these  nations  reside  1  —  What  do  they  cultivate,  and  cany 
on  1  —  What  is  said  of  their  learning,  religion,  &c.  10.  Which  aio 
the  most  improved  races  of  men?  II.  In  what  are  they  much  supe- 
rior 1  12.  Which  are  the  principal  civilized  nations] — In  what  state 
are  the  great  body  of  the  people?  13.  Which  are  the  principal  en- 
lightened nations]  14.  What  are  numerous?  —  What  abound?  — 
What  is  honoured  and  respected?  —  AVhat  may  all  persons  do? 


OOVKRNMENT. 


157 


LESSON  75. 

GOVERNMCNT. 

1.  Government  is  the  power  by  which  the  laws  of  a 
country  are  made  and  administered.  By  the  operation 
of  this  power,  when  wisely  directed,  the  jrood  and  vir- 
tuous are  protected,  and  the  wicked  punished. 

2.  A  free  and  good  government  tends  to  make  a 
nation  industrious,  prosperous,  and  happy.  Under  a 
despotic  and  bad  government,  the  people  become  indo- 
lent, degraded,  and  miserable. 

3.  There  arc  two  general  forms  of  government  in  the 
world,  Monarchy  and  Democracy. 


Birman  Nobles  prostrating  themselves  before  their  Sovereign. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  government  1  —  What  is  the  result  of  the 
operation  of  this  power,  when  wisely  directed  1  2.  To  what  does  a 
good  government  tend  1  —  Under  a  bad  government,  what  will  the 
|)eople  become  1    3.  What  are  thfif  two  general  forms  of  government 


:i'Mr 


i 


f  'ii 


'M 


'  It  i' 


■m 


U 


111. 


158 


rUIMARY    GBCKJRAPIIY. 


4.  Tlio  propio,  under  a  monarchy,  arc  governed  by 
an  I'lnpcTor,  or  Kini^.  He  remains  in  that  station  as 
lonrr  as  ho  hvcs,  whether  he  be  a  good  or  a  bad  man. 

5.  In  sonio  rnuntrios  tho  sovorrigrns  nrr  dospots  and  tyrant.s.  Horo 
tho  jMopIc,  (H'on  of  tlx*  liijjhrst  rank,  must  bow  thrir  faces  to  the 
raith,  and  crocp  on  thoir  hands  and  knees,  when  they  come  near  tie 
throne  where  tlie  king  is  sitting. 

G.  Under  a  Democracy,  or  Repubhcan  government, 
the  laws  are  administered  by  a  President,  who  is  elected 
by  the  people,  for  a  certain  number  of  years. 

7.  If  the  president  does  not  act  wisely,  he  need  not  be  elected  a  se- 
cond time ;  but  another  person  may  be  chosen  in  his  place.  In  the 
United  States,  none  of  the  presidents  have  filled  that  office  more  than 
eight  years. 


President  of  the  United  States  receiving  bit  Friends. 


In  the  world  1  4.  What  are  the  people  under  a  monarchy  governed 
by  1  5.  In  some  countries,  what  must  people,  even  of  the  highest 
rank,  do  1  6.  Under  a  democracy,  who  are  the  laws  administered 
by  I    7.  If  the  president  does  not  act  wisely,  what  may  be  done  ? 


GOVERNMENT. 


159 


8.  The  citizens  of  republicun  governments  enj<iy  a  jfieater  sluire 
of  freedoMi  than  the  suhjeets  of  monarchies.  In  this  country,  when 
nny  of  the  people  wish  to  see  the  president,  they  can  visit  him  as  if 
he  were  a  private  gentleman.  Kmperors  and  kinps  are  otlrn 
^'uard«\i  by  soldiers;  and  no  one  is  allowed  to  go  near  them,  except 
with  great  form  and  ceremony. 

9.  TheUniteil  States  is  the  most  powerful  republican  nation  in  the 
world.  Mexico  and  Texas,  most  of  the  South  American  States,  and 
Switzerland,  are  als)  republics.  In  none  of  these  States,  however, 
are  the  people  *so  free  and  happy  as  in  our  own  country. 

10.  Great  Britain,  France,  Belgium  i,  Holland,  and  some  other  kinpj- 
doms,  are  limited  monarciiies.  In  tnose  countries,  the  power  of  the 
sovereii^ns  is  liniited,  and  no  one  can  be  punished  except  by  due 
process  of  law. 

11.  In  Persia,  Birmah,  Slam,  and  China,  the  so;  reigns  are  abso- 
lute, and  have  entire  control  over  the  property  lud  lives  of  their 
people. 

12.  Emperors  and  Kings  are  often  inriifferent  to  the  welfare  of 
their  subjects.  Some  few,  however,  have  endeavoured  to  improve 
their  condition,  and  govern  wisely. 

13.  Alfred  the  Great,  king  of  England,  and  Peter  the  Great,  emperor 
of  Russia,  are  among  those  sovereigns  who  are  entitled  to  the  re- 
spect of  posterity.  Alfred  enacted  just  laws,  encouraged  learning, 
and  was  one  of  the  wisest  and  best  princes  that  ever  lived. 

14.  Peter  improved  the  condition  of  his  country,  and  travelled 
through  various  parts  of  Europe,  that  he  might  acquire  knowledge 
useful  to  his  people.  In  order  to  know  how  to  build  ships,  he  worked 
in  disguise,  as  a  ship-carpenter,  lu         ' 


England  and  Holland. 


8.  What  do  the  citizens  of  republican  governments  enjoy  1  —  In  this 
country,  how  may  a  person  visit  the  president  1  —  What  are  empe- 
rors and  kings  often  guarded  by  1  9.  What  is  the  United  States  1  — 
What  countries  are  also  republics  1  10.  What  nations  are  limited 
monarchies  1  11.  In  what  countries  are  the  sovereigns  absolute  1 
12.  To  what  are  emperors  and  kings  often  indifferent  1  13.  What 
sovereigns  are  entitled  to  the  respect  of  posterity  1  —  What  did 
Alfred  do  1  14.  What  did  Peter  do  1 
^  * 


ii;:  U 


1 


r 


'.ti 


I? 

>  -11 


u* 


■  1 

1' 

i  ■ 

1: 

160  PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  76. 

RELIGION. 

1.  Religion  is  that  worship  and  homage  which  all 
men  owe  to  God,  as  their  Creator  and  Preserver.  Re- 
ligion is  of  two  kinds,  True  and  False. 

2.  True  religion  consists  in  worshipping  God  in  the  manner  taught 
In  the  Holy  Scriptures.  False  religion  consists  in  worshipping  idols, 
or  images,  representing  men,  beasts,  birds,  or  other  things. 

3.  The  Pagan,  Christian,  Mahomedan,  and  Jewish, 
are  the  forms  of  religion  most  prevalent  in  the  world. 

4.  Some  Pagan  nations  worship  idols,  or  images.  Some  worship 
fire.  Some  adore  the  sun  and  moon.  Others  consider  certain  rivers, 
mountains  and  cities  to  be  holy.  The  principal  Pagan,  or  heathen 
nations,  are,  the  Chinese,  Hindoos,  Birmans,  Siamese  and  Japanese. 


South  Sea  klanderi  preparing  Sacrificei  to  their  idols. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  is  religion  1  2.  In  what  does  true  religion 
consist  1  —  False  religion  1  3.  What  forms  of  religion  are  the  most 
prevalent  ?    4.  What  do  some  Pagan  nations  worship  1  —  Which  are 


RELIGION. 


161 


5.  In  some  of  the  South  Sea  Islands,  men  and  women,  as  well  as 
animals,  are  sacrificed  to  idols.  In  Ashantec,  and  Dahomey,  human 
sacrifices  are  offered  at  the  graves  of  the  princes  and  chief  men. 

6.  Christians  include  all  those  who  lielieve  in  Christ, 
the  Saviour  of  sinners.  They  comprise  three  great 
classes,  Catholics,  Greeks,  and  Protestants. 

7.  Christ  came  to  redeem  mankind  from  sin  and  misery.  He 
taught  them  to  worship  God,  in  spirit  and  in  truth.  He  instructed 
them  in  the  practice  of  faith,  meekness,  and  temperance ;  and  was 
constantly  employed  in  doing  good. 


Christ  healing  the  Sick. 

8.  Our  Saviour  performed  many  astonishing  miracles.    He  raised 
the  dead»  cured  the  sick  and  the  lame,  and  gave  sight  to  the  blind. 

9.  The  French,  Spaniards,  Italians,  and  many  of  the  Germans, 
are  Catholics.    The  Russians  and  Greeks  belong  to  the  Greek 


the  principal  Pagan  nations?  5.  What  is  done  in  some  of  the  South 
Sea  Islands !  —  In  Ashantee,  &c.  ]  G.  What  do  Christians  include  1 
—  What  do  they  comprise?  7.  What  did  Christ  come  to  dol 
8.  What  did  our  Saviour  perform  1  9.  What  nations  are  Catholics  1 
-—Who  belong  to  the  Greek  church?  — What  nations  are,  for  tho 

11 


■ftrfl 


i?l 


!j:i 


162 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


churcli.    The  people  of  the  United  States,  Great  Britain,  Holland, 
and  Prussia,  are,  for  the  most  part,  Protestants. 

10.  The  Christian  nations  are  the  most  enlightened  and  powerful 
in  the  world.  Their  inhabitants  are  the  only  people  that  enjoy  the 
blessings  of  free  government,  and  regard  women  as  rational  beings. 

1 1.  The  Mahomedans  are  those  who  believe  in  the  doctrine  of  the 
false  prophet  Mahomed.  The  Turks,  Moors,  Arabs,  Persians,  and 
some  of  the  Tartars,  profess  this  faith. 


Mahomedans,  in  the  Temple,  at  Mecca,  kissing  the  sacred  Stone. 

12.  Mahomedans  are  required  to  pray  five  times  a  day;  to  abstain 
from  food  at  certain  periods ;  and  to  perform  a  pilgrimage  to  Mecca. 
In  the  temple,  at  Mecca,  there  is  a  black  stone,  considered  sacred, 
which  every  pilgrim  must  touch  and  kiss  seven  times. 

13.  The  Jews  are  the  descendants  of  the  ancient  people  of  God, 
of  whom  we  read  m  the  Bible.  They  despised  and  rejected  Christ, 
and  put  him  to  a  painful  death.  The  Jews  still  adhere  to  their  origi- 
nal faith,  and  do  not  believe  in  the  Saviour  of  mankind. 

most  part,  Protestants?  10.  What  are  the  Christian  nations? 
11.  Who  are  Mahomedans?  —  Which  are  the  principal  Mahomedan 
nations?  12.  What  are  Mahomedans  required  to  do?  13.  Who  are 
the  Jews  ?  —  What  did  they  do?  —  What  is  said  of  the  Jews  ? 


ASTRONOMY. 


163 


LESSON  77. 

ASTRONOMY. 

Having,  at  length,  studied  so  much  of  the  Geography  of  the  earth 
as  is  contained  in  this  little  book,  it  will  not  be  amiss  for  the  Scholar 
to  learn  something  about  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars. 

A  knowledge  of  these  things  may  be  acquired  by  studying  Astro- 
nomy. It  is  .a  most  important  branch  of  learning,  and  has  excited 
the  attention  of  mankind  from  the  earliest  ages. 

1.  Astronomy  is  a  description  of  the  heavens.  The  heavens  con- 
sist of  the  blue  sky,  or  firmament,  that  we  see  above  us.  The  earth  is 
surrounded,  on  every  side,  by  the  heavens. 

2.  In  the  sky  we  see  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars.  The  sun  gives  us 
light  by  day,  and  the  moon  and  stars  serve  the  same  purpose  by  night. 

3.  These  bodies  seem  to  be  all  the  time  in  motion ;  that  is,  they 
appear  to  be  sometimes  in  one  place  and  sometimes  in  another.  In 
the  morning,  the  sun  rises  in  the  east ;  at  noon,  he  is  directly  over  our 
heads ;  and,  in  the  evening,  he  sets  in  the  west. 

4.  The  moon  and  stars  also  rise  in  the  east,  and  set  in  the  west. 
The  moon,  besides  constantly  changing  her  place  in  the  heavens, 
exhibits  a  difference  of  appearance  at  different  times.  Though  the 
stars  appear  nearly  alike,  they  are  of  different  magnitudes,  and  of 
different  degrees  of  brightness. 

5.  The  sun,  moon,  and  stars,  are  called  the  heavenly,  or  celestial 
bodies.  Most  of  them  seem  to  be  mere  specks  in  the  sky.  They  are, 
however,  very  large,  and  are  believed  to  be  great  worlds,  like  our 
own. 

6.  The  immense  distances  at  which  the  celestial  bodies  are  placed 
from  us,  is  the  reason  why  they  appear  so  small.  If  rt  were  possible 
for  us  to  go  near  them,  we  should,  no  doubt,  find  that  they  contain 
land  and  water,  and  are  fitted  for  the  habitation  of  rational  and  in- 
telligent beings. 

Questions.  —  1.   What  is  astronomy  7  —  Of  what   do  the  heavens  consiKf  ? 

2.  What  do  we  see  in  the  sky  ?  —  What  gives  light  by  day  ?  —  What  by  night  ? 

3.  What  do  these  bodies  ■eem  to  be?  4.  What  do  they  do?  —  What  does  the 
moon  exhibit ?  —  What  is  said  of  the  stars?  5.  What  are  the  sun,  moon,  and 
■turs,  called  ?  •—  What  are  they  believed  to  be  ?     6.  Why  do  the  celestial  bodies 


\n 


f 


lU 


li 


h-  -'r-rl 


;  - 


^H 

^1 

'^i  J 

BJ  F' 

i  -1   'A 

mLV 

IL 

164 


PRIMARY    GEOGRAPHY. 


7.  The  magnitudes,  motions,  distances,  periods,  and  order,  of  the 
heavenly  bodies,  are  the  principal  subjects  that  form  the  science  of 
Astronomy. 

8.  The  magnitude  of  a  'eavenly  body  is  its  size.  The  motion 
means  the  way  in  which  it  moves,  or  revolves.  The  periods  signify 
the  space  of  time  that  is  c  culled  by  the  heavenly  bodies  in  perform- 
ing their  yearly  and  daily  revolutions.  The  order  of  the  planets  is 
tlieir  system  of  arrangement  in  a  regular  series,  as  first,  second,  &c. 

9.  The  celestial  bodies  may  be  divided,,  according  to  their  nature, 
into  luminous  and  opaque  [o-pa'ke]. 

10.  Luminous,  or  shining  bodies,  are  such  as  give  light  of  them- 
selves: the  sun  is  a  luminous  body.  Opaque,  or  dark  bodies,  are 
such  as  do  not  give  light  of  themselves.  They  can  be  seen  only  by 
light  from  some  luminous  body  shining  on  them.  The  earth  is  an 
opaque  body.  ^ 


What  belongs  to  the 


LESSON  78.  ' 

SOLARSYSTEM. 

1.  The  earth  is  situated  in  that  part  of  the  universe  called  the  Solar 
System.    This  system,  or  order,  consists  of  thesun,  moon,  planets, 
and  comets.    It  is  called  solar,  from  the  sun. 
sun,  is  termed  solar. 

2.  The  sun  is  the  centre  of  the  Solar  System.  It  gives  light  to  the 
world,  and  is  the  source  of  heat.  It  causes  the  earth  to  bring  forth 
grass ;  the  herb  to  yield  seed ;  and  the  fruit-tree  to  yield  fruit  after 
its  kind. 

3.  If  the  sun  were  taken  away,  we  should  have  no  light,  except 


appear   so  small?     7.  What  are  the  princi 
of  astronomy  7     8.  What  is  the  magnitude  of 
motion  mean  ?  —  What  do  the  periods  signify  ? 
9.  How  may  the  celestial  bodies  be  divided  ? 
bodies?  —VVhat  are  opaque,  or  dark  bodies  ?  — 

Questions.  —  Where  is  the  eorth  situated  ?  • 
—  From  what  is  it  called  solar  7  2.  What  is 
earth  to  bring  forth  7     3.  What  would  be  the 


subjects  that  form  the  science 
a  heavenly  body  7  —  What  does  the 

—  What  is  the  order  of  the  planets  ? 
10.  What  are  luminous,  or  shining 

-  How  can  they  be  seen  7 

—What  does  this  system  consist  of? 
the  sun  7  —  What  doea  it  cause  the 
consequence,  if  the  sun  were  taken 


ASTRONOMY. 


165 


the  faint  glimmering  of  the  stars.  There  would  be  no  day.  The 
ground  would  be  all  the  time  covered  with  ice  and  snow.  No  plant 
or  tree  would  flourish.    Mankind  would  perish  for  want  of  food. 

4.  But  God  has  placed  the  sun  in  the  heavens  to  give  light  and 
heat,  not  only  to  this  world,  but  also  to  a  number  of  other  worlds. 
In  the  beginning  He  caused  the  light  to  shine  out  of  darkness,  and 
said,  "  Let  there  be  light ;  and  there  was  light." 

5.  In  former  times,  it  was  supposed  that  the  sun  was  a  great  ball  of 
fire.  Many  learned  men,  however,  are  of  opinion,  that  it  is  a  woiKl 
like  our  own,  containing  continents,  oceans,  mountains,  and  p!ain:>. 

d  It  is  supposed  that  the  rays  of  light  which  illumine  the  Solar 
System,  proceed  from  an  atmosphere,  or  air,  of  a  peculiar  nature, 
that  surrounds  the  sun.    The  rays  of  the  sun  are  called  solar  rays. 

7.  When  mingled  with  the  atmosphere  on  the  surface  of  the  globe, 
it  is  thought  that  these  rays  produce  the  warmth  and  animation 
which  render  the  earth  habitable. 

8.  This  appears  probable,  from  the  fact  that  the  summits  of  high 
mountains  are  always  covered  with  ice  and  snow,  while  at  their  base, 
and  in  the  valleys,  the  heat  is  oppressive.  If  heat  proceeded  from 
the  sun,  as  from  a  body  of  fire,  the  higher  we  ascend  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  earth,  the  greater  the  heat  would  become. 

9.  The  sun  is  an  immense  mass  of  matter.  It  is  believed  to  be,  at 
least,  fourteen  hundred  thousand  times  larger  timn  our  globe.  Its 
distance  from  us  is  so  great,  that  it  would  take  a  cannon-ball,  which 
moves  through  the  air  at  the  rate  of  five  hundred  miles  an  hour, 
about  twenty-two  years  to  reach  the  sun. 

10.  The  sun  appears,  to  our  naked  sight,  to  be  perfectly  flat  and 
smooth ;  but,  from  the  dark  moving  spots  frequently  seen  on  its  sur- 
face, it  is  rendered  almost  certain  that  it  is  a  spherical  body,  and 
that  it  turns  round  once  every  twenty-five  days. 

away  ?  4.  For  what  purpose  has  God  placed  the  sun  in  the  heavens  ?  5.  Whut 
was  formerly  thought  ?  —  What  is  the  opinion  of  many  learned  men  ?  6.  What 
is  it  supposed  the  rays  of  light  proceed  from  ?  7.  What  is  it  thought  these  rays 
produce  ?  8.  From  what  fact  does  this  appear  probable  7  —  If  heat  proceeded 
from  the  sun,  as  from  a  body  of  fire,  what  would  be  the  effect  ?  9.  What  is  the 
■un  ?  —  How  large  is  it  believed  to  be  7  —  How  long  would  it  take  a  cannon*baIi 
o  reach  the  sun  7  10.  How  does  tlio  sun  appear,  to  our  naked  eight  7  —  What  i» 
it  known  to  be  ?  ^ 


m 


n 


•i 


I 


X 


m 


\^'^ 


Hi 


166  PRIMARY    GROGRAI'flY. 


LESSON  79. 

OF  THE   MOON.  * 

1.  Next  to  the  sun,  the  moon  is  the  largest  and  mosc  fariiiliar  ;.;>- 
ject  that  wc  see  in  the  sky.  It  is  the  nearest  to  the  earth  of  all  the 
heavenly  bodies.  Though  the  moon  appears  almost  as  large  as  tlic 
sun,  it  is  many  million  times  stnaller. 

2.  The  moon  is  an  opaque,  or  dark  body,  and,  like  the  other  plane*-?, 
has  no  light  of  its  own  :  it  shinrs  by  ligiit  that  it  i«^ceives  from  the 
sun.  Though  less  splendid  than  that  luminary,  the  moon  *.?  a  highly 
interesting  and  beautiful  object. 

3.  The  mooii  goc^  round  the  earth,  from  west  to  east,  once  in 
twenty-nine  and  a  lialf  days.  It  has  always  the  same  side,  or  face, 
turned  towards  ii3, 

4.  Nearly  all  tisc  heavenly  bodies  present  the  same  appearance ; 
but  the  moon  is  constantly  changing.  Sometimes  it  is  not  seen  at 
all ;  sometimes  only  a  small  edge  is  bright ;  sometimes  one  half;  and 
at  other  times,  the  whole  surface  is  lurninous,  or  shining. 

5.  These  different  forms  are  called  the  phases,  or  changes  of  the 
moon.  They  are  the  new,  the  half,  the  gibbous,  the  full,  and  the  olo 
moon.    The  engraving  will  show  how  the  phases  appear. 


New. 

Half. 

Gibbous. 

Full. 

Gibbous. 

Half. 

Old. 

i 

Bf            _^[^^l 

c 

9 

6.  At  the  change  of  the  moon,  that  body  is  dark,  and  we  see  no- 


y.    1 


Questions. —  1.  Next  to  the  sun,  which  is  the  largest  object  we  see  in  the  sky? 
2.  What  is  the  moon  ?  —  What  does  it  shine  by  ?  3.  How  does  the  moon  go 
round  the  earth  ?  —  What  has  it  always  ?  4.  What  do  nearly  all  the  heavenly 
bodies  present  ?  —  What  is  said  of  the  in»K>n  ?  5.  What  aic  these  changes  called  ? 
—  What  are  they  ?     6.  How  does  the  new  moon  apjiear  ?  —  How  are  the  ho»ns 


ASTRONOMY. 


167 


'e  see  no- 


thing of  it ;  soon  afterwards  the  now  moon  appears  in  the  form  of  a 
crescent,  or  siclcle  without  a  handle,  in  the  western  sky,  just  above 
the  sun,  when  he  is  settingr.  Tlie  horns,  or  sharp  points  of  the  new 
moon,  are  turned  to  the  left  hand. 

7.  In  three  or  four  days  more  it  becomes  a  half  moon ;  it  then 
gradually  assumes  the  gibbous  form,  and,  in  two  weeks  from  the 
change,  the  moon  becomes  full.  It  has  now  completed  one  half  of  its 
monthly  joui  aey. 

8.  The  fulF  moon  is  round  and  bright,  like  the  sun,  but  does  not 
dazzle  the  sight  to  look  at  it.  It  rises  in  the  east,  when  the  sun  sets, 
and  sets  in  the  west,  when  he  rises.    It  shines  all  night. 

9.  The  full  moon  rises  later  and  later  every  night,  and,  in  a  s!iort 
time,  assumes  the  gibbous  form.  At  three  weeks  after  the  first 
change  it  becomes  once  more  a  half  moon ;  then  crescent-shaped,  or 
horned.    In  this  state  it  is  called  the  old  moon. 

10.  The  new  moon  rises  in  the  evening,  and  the  old  in  the  morn- 
ing. The  horns  of  the  old  moon  are  turned  towards  the  right  hand. 
Finally,  at  four  weeks  after  her  first  change,  the  bright  side  of  the 
moon  is  turned  fiom  us,  and  she  is  no  longer  seen,  until  the  new 
moon  appears  again. 

11.  Thus  the  moon  is  constantly  performing  her  stated  monthly 
journeys  round  the  earth,  and  cheering  the  inhabitants  with  her  mild 
radiance,  while  at  the  same  time  she  exhibits  her  wonderful  changes, 
and  furnishes  one  of  the  most  striking  displays  of  divine  power  and 
wisdom. 

12.  Prayers  and  sacrifices  were  offered  to  the  moon  by  many  of 
the  ancient  heathen  nations,  and  some  of  the  people  of  China  now 
worship  that  planet.  The  Jews  observed  the  time  of  new  moon,  as 
a  period  of  feasting  and  rejoicing.  They  reckoned  time  by  the  moon. 
The  American  Indians  also  practise  the  same  method. 

of  the  new  moon  turned  ?  7.  In  three  or  four  days  more,  what  does  it  become  7 
—  What  docs  it  then  gradually  assume  7  —  What  takes  place  in  two  weeks  from 
the  change  ?  8.  What  is  said  of  the  full  moon  ?  —  Where  does  it  rise,  Sec.  7 
9.  When  does  the  full  moon  rise?  —  In  a  short  time,  what  does  it  assume  ? — > 
What  does  it  become,  in  three  weeks  after  the  first  change,  &c.  ?  10.  How  are 
the  horns  of  the  old  moon  turned? — What  takes  place  at  four  weeks  after  tho 
first  change 7  11.  What  is  the  moon  constantly  performing?  —  What  does  she 
exhibit  7  13.  What  were  offered  to  the  moon  7  —  What  is  said  of  the  people  of 
China  7  — ^The  Jews  ?  —  American  Indians  ? 

H 


^     !'*•' 


1F^ 


1 08 


PRIMARY    ti^:Ori^APIIY. 


I 


m 


r'fl 

m 

1  '1 

B, 

H 

Bli: 

^^HF  '^'^   ' 

fln     ' 

jjtS  ^ 

JUb.  ^ 

i^^H  t 

H 

■  ! 

LESSON  80. 

r  L  A  \  E  T  S . 

1.  TuGRB  arc  two  kinds  of  stars  to  be  soon  in  the  heavens;— (I i(> 
planots  and  the  fixed  stars.  The  first  are  called  moving,  or  wander- 
ing stars,  because  they  alter  their  positions  in  the  sky. 

2.  The  planets  are  opaque  bodies,  and  have  no  lijjht  of  their  own, 
but  sliine  by  refloctinethe  light  of  the  sun,  around  which  they  niovr, 
or  revolve.  Some  of  them  are  many  hundred  times  larger  than  the 
earth;  but  others  arc  of  less  size. 

Comparative  hjzc  of  the  Planets. 


This  picture  shows  that  the  earth  is  much  smnller  than  Jupiter, 
Saturn,  and  Uranus.  The  planets  Venus,  Mars,  Mercury,  and  the 
Moon,  are  still  smaller. 

3.  The  planets  all  appear  to  be  spherical  bodies ;  that  is,  they  are 
round,  like  a  ball,  or  an  apple.  Each  of  them,  by  turning  constantly 
on  its  own  axis,  has  a  regular  succession  of  day  and  night. 

4.  The  varied  appearance  which  the  su  Hace  of  the  planets  presents, 
when  examined  by  powerful  telescopes,  shows  that  some  parts  are 
hiirh,  and  some  are  low ;  some  are  bright,  and  others  are  dark.  The 
bright  parts  are  supposed  to  be  land,  and  the  dark  parts  water. 

QiTKSTioNs. —  1.  How  many,  and  what  kinds  of  stars  arc  there  in  the  heavens  ? 
—  What  do  they  form  a  part  of?  2.  What  are  the  planets  ?  —  How  do  they 
shino  ?  —  What  arc  some  of  the  planets  ?  3.  How  do  the  planets  appear  ? 
4.  What  are  the  bright  and  dark  parts  of  the  planets  supposed  to  be  ?     5.  How 


11 1  Li    I'LANKTS. 


161) 


5.  The  planets  are  twenty-nino  in  number.  They  are  ilivided  into 
two  classes.  The  first  class  cnihraees  what  ar«*  called  prinj  iry 
planets,  because  they  revolve  imniedialely  around  the  sun. 

(i.  The  other  class  cnipriscs  the  secondary  planets,  moons,  or 
satellites.  They  revoh  o  immediately  arour.d  their  respective  prima- 
ries, and  go  around  the  sun  in  company  with  thoso  bodies. 

7.  The  satellites  are  much  smaller  than  the  planets  around  whi(  !i 
they  move.  They  give  light  to  those  bodies  in  the  same  manner  tliat 
the  moon  cTllightens  tiie  parts  of  the  earth  that  arc  turned  from  t!»e 
.sun.  The  satellites  present  the  same  changes,  or  phases,  that  we 
see  in  the  moon. 

8.  The  primary  planets  are  eleven  in  number.  Their  names  are, 
Mercury,  Venus,  the  Earth,  Mars,  Vesta,  Juno,  Ceres,  Pallas,  Jupi- 
ter, Saturn,  and  Uranus. 

9.  The  secondary  planets,  or  moons,  are  eighteen  in  number.  Ol' 
these  the  earth  has  one  moon,  Jupiter  four,  Saturn  seven,  and  Ura- 
nus six. 

10.  Five  of  the  primary  planets,  viz.  Mercury,  Venus,  Mars,  Juj)i- 
tcr,  and  Saturn,  were  known  to  the  ancients  before  the  birth  of  our 
Saviour.  The  other  five  have  been  discovered  by  modern  astrono- 
mers, within  the  last  fifty  or  sixty  years. 

11.  The  planets  perform  their  revolutions  around  the  sun  in  difler- 
ent  periods  of  time,  and  at  different  distances.  Those  planets  near 
the  sun,  perform  their  revolutions  in  less  time  than  those  that  are 
farther  off,  because  they  move  faster,  and  have  less  distance  to  go. 


LESSON  81. 

THE     PLANETS. 

1,  Mercury  is  the  planet  nearest  to  the  sun.    It  is  the  most  rapid 
in  its  motion  of  any  of  the  planets,  and  is  much  smaller  than  the  earth. 

many  planets  arc  there  ?  —  What  is  the  first  class  cuMed  ?  6.  What  docs  the  of  licr 
class  comprise?  7.  What  are  the  satellites —  How  do  they  give  light? —  VVhiit 
do  the  satellites  present  ?  8.  How  many  primary  planets  arc  there  ?  —  Which  arc 
they?  9.  How  many  secondary  planets  are  there  ?  10.  Which  five  of  the  pri- 
mary planets  were  known  to  the  ancients  belbre  the  birth  of  our  Saviour  ?  11.  How 
do  the  planets  perform  their  revolutions  round  the  sun  ?  —  Why  do  the  planets  near 
the  Hun  perform  their  revolutions  in  less  time-tnan  those  that  are  farther  orfT? 

Questions. —  1.  What  is  Mercury  ?  — What  is  said  of  the  motion,  &c.  of 


>ii! 


170 


PRIMARY    GEOORAPflY. 


RiiS 


2.  Venua  is  the  serond  planet  from  the  sun.  It  is  about  twice  as 
far  off  as  Mercury,  and1s  almost  the  size  of  the  earth.  Vonus  is  tho 
most  beautiful  star  we  see  in  the  heavens.  It  apjiears  iar^'er  to  us 
than  any  of  the  other  planets,  because  it  is  nearer. 

3.  This  beautiful  planet  is  seen  for  a  considerable  part  of  the  year 
in  the  western  sky,  just  after  sun-set.  It  is  then  called  the  Evcninjj:- 
Star.  For  the  rest  of  the  year  it  may  be  seen  in  the  east,  immediulLiy 
before  sun-rise,  and  is  then  called  tHe  Morning-Star. 

4.  Tho  earth  is  a  planet,  like  Mercury,  or  Venus.  It  is  a  very  hw^o 
body;  yet,  it  is  believed,  if  we  could  see  it  from  the  planet  Jupiter, 
which  is  placed  about  four  hundred  millions  of  miles  Irom  us,  it 
would  appear  like  one  of  the  smallest  stars  in  the  sky. 

6.  The  earth  is  the  third  planet,  in  order,  from  the  sun.  It  moves, 
or  revolves,  from  west  to  east  round  that  luminary,  once  a  year,  at 
the  distance  of  ninety-five  millions  of  miles. 

6.  It  revolves  in  its  orbit  at  the  rate  of  sixty-eight  thousand  miles 
an  hour;  which  is?  more  than  one  thousand  miles  in  a  minute. 
Though  one  hundred  and  thirty-six  times  swifter  than  that  of  a  can- 
non-ball, the  motion  of  the  eartn  is  not  much  more  than  half  as  last 
as  that  of  the  planet  Mercury. 

7.  The  movement  of  the  earth  round  the  sun,  is  called  the  annual, 
or  yearly  revolution.  It  produces  a  change  of  seasons,  and  also  the 
difference  that  takes  place  in  the  lengths  of  the  days  and  nights. 

8.  The  earth  likewise  turns,  or  revolves  on  its  axis,  from  west  to 
east,  once  every  twenty-four  hours.  This  is  called  the  daily  motion. 
It  makes  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars,  appear  to  move  from  east  to  west 
over  our  heads.  In  this  way,  also,  the  different  countries  in  the  world 
have  each  their  succession  of  day  and  night. 

9.  Though  the  earth  is  impelled  at  so  swift  a  rate,  we  do  not  feel 
the  motion,  because  the  people,  and  everything  on  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  move  with  it.    If  we  were  travelling  rapidly  in  a  steam-boat,  in 


Mercury  ?  9.  Which  ia  the  second  planet  from  the  sun  ?  —  What  is  Venus  ? 
3.  What  is  Venus  called,  for  a  considerable  part  of  the  year  ?  —  What  is  it  called 
the  rest  of  the  year  ?  4.  What  is  the  earth  on  which  we  live  ?  —  How  would  the 
earth  appear,  if  we  could  see  it  from  Jupiter?  5.  What  is  the  earth?  6.  At 
what  rate  does  it  revolve  ?  7.  What  is  the  movement  of  the  earth  round  the  sun 
called  ?  —  What  does  it  produce  ?  8.  Besides  its  yearly  motion,  how  does  the 
earth  also  revolve?  —  What  ia  this  revolution  called?    9.  Why  do  we  not  feel 


fcr  to  us 


TIIR    PLANRT8    AND    COMETS. 


171 


smooth  water,  the  houses  nnd  trees  on  the  shore  woiiM  appear  to  go 
from  us,  while  the  stcuin-bu<it  would  seem  to  stand  still. 

10.  The  moon  is  a  satellite,  or  secondary  planet.  It  accompanies 
the  earth  In  her  journey  roun<i  the  sun,  moving  at  the  rate  of  twenty- 
three  luindred  miles  every  hour.  The  diameter  of  the  moon  is 
twenty-two  hundred  miles;  and  her  distance  from  the  earth  two  hun- 
dred and  forty  thousand  miles. 

11.  In  the  revolution  which  that  body  makes  round  the  earth,  it 
sometimes  happens  that  the  moon  comes  directly  between  the  earth 
and  the  sun.    This  produces  what  is  called  an  eclipse. 

12.  In  an  eclipse  of  the  moon,  mat  planet  is  darkened,  for  a  short 
time,  to  the  people  that  live  on  the  earth.  In  an  eclipse  of  the  sun, 
the  latter  is  also  darkened.  When  that  event  takes  place,  the  moon 
comes  directly  between  the  earth  and  the  sun. 


LESSON  82. 

THE    PLANETS    AND    COMETS. 

1.  Mars  is  the  fourth  planet  from  the  sun.  It  may  be  seen  with 
the  naked  eye,  and  is  of  a  deep  red  colour.  This  planet  is  about 
one-seventh  the  size  of  the  earth. 

2.  Vesta,  Juno,  Ceres,  and  Pallas,  are  four  planets  that  revolve 
near  each  other,  some  distance  beyond  Mars.  They  are  called  Aster- 
oids, or  little  stars,  and  were  the  last  discovered  of  the  planets. 

3.  Jupiter  revolves  beyond  the  Asteroids.  It  is  the  largest  of  the 
planets,  being  thirteen  hundred  times  larger  than  the  earth,  and  is 
tive  times  farther  from  the  sun.  This  planet  is  attended  by  four 
moons,  or  satellites. 


the  motion  of  the  earth  7  10.  What  is  the  mcam  ?  —  What  is  the  diameter  of  the 
moon,  &c.  ?  11.  What  sometimes  happens  ?  —  What  does  this  produce  ?  13.  In 
an  eclipse  of  the  moon,  what  takes  place  ?  —  In  an  eclipse  of  the  sun,  what  takes 
place  ? 

Questions.  —  1.  What  is  Mars  ?  —  How  may  it  be  seen  ?  —  Ifow  will  it  compare 
with  the  earth  7  2.  What  are  Vesta,  Juno,  Ceres,  and  Pallas  7  —  What  are  they 
called?    3.  What  is  said  of  Jupiter 7  —  What  it)  this  planet  attended  by  7    4. 


172 


I'RIMAKY    GEOUIlArilY. 


• 


t 


m 


I 


f  ; 


■'M 


i 


hi 


B4-« 


4.  Jupiter  is  tlio  largrst  star  wo  see  in  the  hoavrns,  I'xcrpt  Nfnus. 
It  is  of  a  (loop  yellow  rolour.  Through  a  telescopo,  Iho  body  off  his 
planet  appears  to  he  stri|H'(l,  or  bandeil,  with  light  und  dark  streaks. 

5.  Saturn  is  one  of  the  lar^'ost  of  the  planets.  It  is  a  thousnnd 
times  larger  than  the  earth,  and  is  nine  times  farther  from  the  sun. 
Saturn  is  attendetl  by  seven  satellites,  and  is  surrounded  hy  two 
immi^nse  rings,  whicii  are  entirely  detached  from  the  body  of  the 
planet. 

0.  Uranus  is  nineteen  times  farther  from  the  sun  than  the  ojuih. 
It  is  the  most  distant  planet  in  the  solar  .system,  and  has  si.K  moons. 

7.  The  sky,  when  viewed  through  telescopes  that  enlarge  objects 
fivv  hundred  or  a  thousand  times  beyond  their  apparent  size,  presents 
a  inueh  more  splendid  sight  than  when  observed  with  the  naked  eye. 
The  aspect  of  the  heavens,  as  seen  from  some  of  the  planets,  is  doubt- 
less grand  and  imposing  beyond  any  thing  of  which  we  have  a 
conception.  \ 

8.  The  rings  of  Saturn  must  appear,  after  dark,  to  the  inhabitants 

Appearance,  at  night,  oftho  Rings  and  Sntcllitea  of  Saturn,  to  the  Inhabitants 

of  that  Planet. 


What  is  Jupiter  7  —  How  does  this  planet  appear,  when  viewed  through  a  tele, 
scope  ?  5.  What  is  Saturn  ?  —  By  what  is  Saturn  attended,  &c.  ?  6.  What  is 
said  of  Uranus  ?  7.  What  does  the  sky  present,  when  viewed  through  telescopes, 
&.C.  —  What  is  the  probable  aspect  of  the  heavens,  as  seen  from  some  of  the 
planets?    a.  How  must  the  rings  of  Saturn  appear,  after  dark,  to  tlie  inhabitants 


THE    PLANETS    AND    C0MnT3. 


173 


f»f  that  planot,  liko  vast  shinlnp  nrclips  of  Ii|jht,  strotcliinff  across  tin* 
(irni.inu'nt,  and  oonipylnji  near  ono-fonrth  ol  tUo  visil>I«»  sky. 

0.  At  tho  same  time,  tho  various  asports  of  tlio  srvon  moons 
which  revolve  around  that  planot,  add  infinite  variety  to  Ha  cclfstia! 
scenery.  Of  these,  .some  arc  seen  risinjr,  some  settin*;,  some  of  them 
appearing  as  half  moons,  and  others  full. 

10.  The  sublime  operations  of  Providence  displayed  throu«:hout 
that  spacious  plobe,  must,  should  it  be  peopled  i)y  rational  l)eini(M, 
l.'^ad  them  (o  look  with  wonder  and  admiration  on  the  works  of  the 
('r«ate\  and  prompt  them  to  render  to  the  Divine  Architect,  that 
praise  which  is  so  justly  due  to  his  wisdom  and  omnipotence. 

1 1.  The  Comets  are  among  the  most  remarkable  of  the  heavenly 
bodies.  They  shine  like  stars,  but  have  generally  a  tail,  or  train,  of 
fainter  light,  bearing  some  resemblance  to  a  tuft  of  liair. 

12.  Some  comets  have  no  tail;  some  have  one,  two,  or  three  at  a 
time ;  and  one  has  been  seen  with  six  at  once,  spreading  out  like  an 
immense  fan.  Some  of  Jliese  bodies  have  had  tails  of  such  vast 
length  as  to  reach  over  a  great  part  of  the  heavens.  The  tail  of  the 
comet  of  1G!^0  stretched  from  the  zenith,  that  is,  directly  over  our 
heads,  to  the  horizon,  or  edge  of  the  sky. 

13.  These  bodies  revolve,  like  the  planets,  round  the  sun,  Init  retire 
to  a  much  greater  distance  from  it.  We  can  see  theni  only  during 
a  part  of  their  course,  as  they  approach  the  sun.  The  comets  remain 
lost  to  our  view,  during  the  immense  journeys  which  they  perf<jrm, 
to  the  most  distant  parts  of  the  solar  system. 

14.  Comets  were,  in  ancient  times,  a  source  of  terror  to  mankind. 
Wars,  pestilence,  or  famine,  were  expected  to  follow  their  appear- 
ance. At  present,  however,  they  excite  but  little  apprehension. 
None  of  them  appear  to  have  had  any  effect  on  the  planets,  though 
some  comets  have  approached  very  near  to  those  bodies. 


of  that  planet  ?  f).  What  adds  infinito  variety  to  its  celestial  scenery?  10.  To 
what  must  the  sublime  operations  of  Providence  lead  the  inliabitants  of  Saturn  7 
11.  What  is  said  of  comets  7  12.  What  have  some  comets,  &c.  ?  —  What  is  s.-.ld 
of  the  con«et  of  1680  ?  13.  How  do  these  bodies  revolve  7  —  During  what  period 
can  we  see  them  ?  —  During  what  period  do  they  remain  lost  to  our  view  '/  14. 
What  were  comets,  in  ancient  times  7  —  At  present  what  do  they  excite  7 


174 


SOLAR    8YSTEM. 


I'/^t 


i-.j! 


m 


^!2^!>!hofUram«H>»nd*e5^" 


The  Engraving  is  a  view,  or  Map  of  the  Solar  System.  The  Sun  is  in  the  centre. 
The  cifcular  lines  are  the  rxacks  or  orbits  of  the  Planets,  in  which  they  revolve  or 
journey  round  the  Sun. 

Point  out  the  Sun  —  Mercury  —  Vennt.  The  two  last  are  called  interior  planets, 
because  they  move  between  the  Earth  and  the  Sun. 

Point  out  the  Earth  and  the  Moon  —  Mars —  Vetla  —  Juno  —  Ceres — Pallas — Jupi' 
ter  —  Saturn — Uranus.  The  last  eight  are  called  exterior  planets,  because  ihey  re- 
volve beyond  the  orbit  of  the  earth. 

Tell  how  many  planets  there  are.  All  the  black  spots  on  the  engraving,  except  the 
comet,  represent  planets. 

How  many  nxMitis  iios  the  Earth  ?    How  many  has  Jupiter  ?  Saturn  f  Uranus  t 


m 


FIXED   STARS. 


175 


LESSON  83. 

FIXED   STARS. 

1.  The  Fixed  Stars  are  those  celestial  bodies  which  remain  nearly 
always  in  the  same  position,  with  regard  to  each  other.  These  stars 
shine  with  a  bright,  twinkling  light:  they  appear  to  bo  infinite  in 
number,  ancl  are  placed  far  beyond  the  limits  of  our  system. 

2.  The  distance  of  the  fixed  stars  from  the  earth,  may  be  reganled 
as  immeasurable.  There  is  no  visible  alteration  in  their  magnitudfs 
or  situation,  when  viewed  from  opposite  sides  of  the  '•arth's  orbit. 
That  vast  space,  which  is  one  hundred  and  ninety  millions  i)f  miles 
in  extent,  may,  therefore,  be  regarded  as  a  point,  in  comparison  to 
the  distance  of  the  fixed  stars. 

3.  It  has  been  calculated  that  Sirius,  the  nearest  fixed  star,  must 
be  more  than  two  hundred  thousand  times  fartiier  from  the  earth 
than  the  latter  is  from  the  sun. 

4.  Light,  which  reaches  us  in  eight  minutes  from  the  sun,  would, 
it  is  supposed,  be  about  three  years  in  flying  from  Sirius  to  o«ir 
earth.  There  are,  no  doubt,  myriads  of  stars  at  a  much  greater  dis- 
tance ;  and  perhaps  many  whose  Jight  has  never  reached  our  world. 

5.  The  number  of  the  stars  is  no  less  surprising  than  their  distance. 
In  a  clear  night,  we  may  see  about  a  thousand  at  once,  with  the 
naked  eye;  but,  by  looking  through  a  telescope,  millions  may  be 
seen,  in  a  very  short  time. 

6.  Some  stars,  that  seem  at  first  to  be  single,  are  found  to  consist 
of  two,  some  of  three,  and  some  more.  They  are  also  of  diflerent 
colours,  as  yellow,  red,  blue,  and  green.  New  stars  occasionally 
appear,  and  some  disappear.  Others  become  brighter  and  brighter, 
for  a  time,  and  then  fade  away. 


Questions.  —  1.  What  are  the  Fixed  Stars?  —  How  do  they  phiue  ?  —  Where 
are  they  placed  ?  2.  How  may  the  distance  of  the  fixed  stars  from  the  earth 
be  regarded? — In  what  is  there  no  visible  alteration  7  —  How  does  the  dia. 
meter  of  the  earth's  orbit  compare  with  the  distance  of  the  fixed  stars  ?  3.  How 
much  farther  is  Sirius  from  the  earth,  than  from  the  sun  ?  4.  How  long  docs  it 
take  light  to  reach  us  from  the  sun,  and  also  from  Sinus  ?  5.  How  many  stars 
may  we  see  with  the  naked  eye?  —  By  looking  through  a  telescope,  what  n)ay 
be  seen  ?    C.  What  do  sonic  stars  seem,  &c,?  —  What  is  said  of  new  stars,  •Stc.  ? 


I 


176 


FiUMAUY    GliUCiKAI'UV. 


I.  '  I  !i 


'  'I  I 


7.  We  are  ignorant  of  the  nature  and  constitution  of  tlie  lixrd 
stars;  but  as  these  exhibit  no  chanj^es  in  their  position,  as  regards 
one  another,  they  are  supposed  to  be  innnense  luminaries,  like  our 
sun,  surrounded  by  systems  of  planets,  which  they  enlighten,  warm, 
and  cherish. 

8.  Observation  teaches  us  that  the  planets  are  similar,  in  many 
respects,  to  the  earth;  we  may  therefore  conclude  that  those,  and 
otiier  celestial  bodies,  are  worlds  like  our  own,  and  peopled  with 
nmnerous  living  beings,  adapted  by  the  all-wise  Creator  to  the 
abodes  which  they  inhabit. 

9.  The  universe  appears  to  be  infinite  in  extent,  and  far  exceeds 
the  reach  of  thought.  In  its  wonderful  operations,  we  see  the  most 
perfect  order  and  stability,  and  we  may  suppose  that  the  same  laws 
embrace  all  creation ;  which  thus  forms  a  connected  and  harmonious 
whole. 

In  conclusion,  we  trust  that  the  few  Lessons  that  have  been  given 
on  Astronomy  will  render  the  scholars  who  use  this  little  work,  de- 
sirous of  learning  more  about  that  wonderful  science. 

The  Author  will,  perhaps,  at  some  future  period,  write  a  book 
which  will  enable  them  to  become  better  acquainted  with  the  subject. 

Every  one  should  endeavour  to  acquire  a  knowledge  of  the  works 
of  creation.  The  mind  is  thereby  enlarged,  and  we  are  led  to  a  more 
just  understanding  of  the  power  of  God.  It  erables  us  also  to  com- 
prehend more  fully  the  order  and  perfection  displayed  in  the  struc- 
ture of  the  universe.  • 

Besides  the  interesting  information  to  be  gained  by  the  study  of 
Astronomy,  it  is,  no  doubt,  a  Christian  duty,  to  contemplate  the  per- 
fections of  the  Deity,  as  they  are  displayed  in  the  starry  heavens. 

We  are  directed  in  the  Bible,  to  "  Lift  up  our  eyes  on  high,  and 
consider  Him  who  hath  created  these  orbs ;  who  bringeth  forth  their 
hosts  by  number,  and  who  guides  them,  in  all  their  motions,  by  the 
greatness  of  his  strength." 

7.  What  arc  wo  ipfnoranlof?  —  What  are  the  fixed  stars  supposed  to  be  ?  8. 
What  does  observation  teach  us  ?  —  What  may  we  therefore  conclude  ?  9.  What 
docs  the  universe  appear  ?  —  What  do  we  see  in  its  wonderful  operations  ? 


THE    END. 


VAUAHLH  N(  HOOI.  HUOKS 
PUBLISHED  BY  THOMAS,  (MJVVPERTHWAIT  &  CO.,  PIIH^AD., 

AND    For   S\I,K    DY 

The  Dnokscllcrs  irfncrnlhj  throughout  the  United  Statesf. 


MITCHELL'S 

AMERICAN    SYSTEM    OF 

STANDARD    SCHOOL    GEOGRAPHY, 

IN     A     SERIES: 
Adapted  to  the  progressively  developing  capacities  of  Youth. 

MITCHELL'S  PRIMARY  GEOGRAPHY,  containing  120  Engravings  and 
14  Coloured  Maps,  designed  as  a  first  bunk  uf  Geography  for  Children. 

MITCHELL'S  SCHOOL  GE0(;RAPHY,  accompanied  with  an  Atlas,  con- 
taining 18  Mapi,  ongraved  from  Original  Drawings,  and  executed  in  a  clear  and  distinct  manner. 

MITCHELL'S  ATLAS  OF  OUTLINE  MAPS,  (an  accompaniment  to  the 
School  Atlas,}  possessing  all  Uie  advantages  to  bo  derived  from  map-drawing,  with  a  great  saving  of 
time. 

MITCHELL'S  GEOGRAPHIC^  i  READER,  designed  as  a  reading-book 
for  Classes  using  the  School  Geography,  or  for  pupils  further  advanced  :  nn  important  feature  of  thin 
work  is.  that  its  introduction  into  schools  can  be  cfTocted  without  additional  cnst,  by  dispen.sini;  wiih 
other  reading  books.  Tnis  will  bring  it  within  the  means  of  the  humblest  pupilH,  and  enable  our  whole 
population  to  acquire  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  science. 

MITCHELL'S  KEY  TO  THE  STUDY  OF  THE  MAPS  COMPRIS- 
ING  HIS   ATLAS  ;  in  a  series  of  Lessons  for  beginners  in  Geography. 

MITCHELL'S  HKJH  SCHOOL  i^EOGR APHY,  WITH  AN  ATLAS, 

tin  press.)  will  contain  about  ftOO  pagfg,  and  comprise  a  complete  system  of  Mathematical,  PhyHiral, 
'olitical.  Statistical,  ond  Descriptive  Mudern  (>-:»rigru|)hy,  tui^elher  with  a  compendium  of  Anciiiu 
Geoeruphy,  and  the  whole  will  be  illustrn'''d  by  Viewti,  reprcstMitations  of  rt^markable  natural  objecii^, 
Illustrations  of  Costumes,  Architecture,  Raceu  of  Mun^  Animals,  Stc.  The  whole  uf  the  Engravintjs 
executed  by  the  tint  artists  of  the  couutry. 

The  Atlas  to  nccompany  the  above  wi!  contain  not  less  than  30  Maps,  constructed  pnrticulnrly  fur 
the  work,  and  designed  to  correspond  with  und  illustrate  it  in  the  most  precise  manner.  The  Maps  will 
be  engraved  in  the  neat  and  distinct  Ktyle  for  which  those  of  "Mitchell's  School  Atlns"  are  ilixun- 
guished  ;  they  will  contain,  however,  in  some  respe;:ts.  a  ureater  ntnount  of  detail,  and  such  addnional 
particulars  as  the  higher  und  more  advanced  grade  of  tuition  fur  which  they  are  intended  may  duiuui.d. 


FROST'S   UNITED  STATES.  —  History  of  the  United  Slates ;  for  the  use  of 

Schools  and  Academics.    Hy  John  Frost.    Illu.'«tratcd  with  forty  Engravings. 

HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES,  FOR  THE  USE  OF  COM- 
MON SCHOOLS.  —  By  John  Frost,  author  of  History  of  the  United  S'atps  liir  ilie 
use  of  Schools  and  Academies  :  condensed  from  the  Author's  larger  History  of  the  United  folates. 

FROST'S  AMERICAN  SPEAKER.— The  American  Speaker,  compriHJne  a 

Comprehensive  Treatise  on  Elocution,  and  nn  extensive  Seleciinn  of  Hperimeiis  of  Amerirnn  (iinl  K>i- 
roign  Eloquence.  Eiiihi'llished  witli  cnirravi-d  Portraits  of  dislinguibhod  American  Orutoru,  on  steel. 
Ity  J.  Frost,  author  of  History  of  (ho  I'niled  Slates. 

(177^ 


178 


VALUABLE    .SCHOOL    ROOKS. 


PINiNOCK'S  i:\C;LAIVD.  —  Pinnock'H  improve*!  wlinoii  of  Dr.  GoldHiniih'* 
Ilial(ir)r  of  KiiKtand,  from  Uio  Invoaionuf  JuliunCuitar  to  Uivyviir  JCiJi?.  illuNtralud  with  30  Lngravionii 
on  WuiMt. 

PIS  DOCK'S  GRKECK.  —  Pirinock's  improved  edilion  of  Dr.  GoldHmilh'H  History 
of  (JMHTf;  wfiili  Uucatiotis  for  ExttoiiiiaUon  ul  Uiu  tud  ol  uacli  Hvctioii ;  with  M  Eit^ruviiiKa,  by 
Aihvrtuii. 

PINNOCK'S  HOME.  —  Pinnock'a  improved  edilio  i  of  Dr.  Goldsmith's  History  (»r 
Itoiiiu  ;  Willi  Uuuvtitinii  fur  Kxnminiition  at  tite  t>iid  of  each  Heciion  ;  wiih  3(1  Kii|iriivint:H,  hy  Aiiit'iton. 

SIMSON'S  EUCLID.  —  The  Klements  of  Kuciid,  viz.  the  fir«l  Six  lJ<K)k8.  tomili<r 
w  iih  tilt!  KU^'fiiih  Hnd  Twell\li.  Tho  crnir*  by  which  Tliuun,  or  othfirn.  Ii.i;  c  img  viiiai'it  iht'«f  l»i»«tks 
:iM'  cortiTit'il,  and  mniin  of  Fjuclid'it  itnmonMirutiunB  are  revtorud.  lly  lloh- ri  Siihxoii,  M.|).,  i'lu-.tTiiuri 
i'M'ti-hsor  ut  MuiheiaatiCH  in  the  Uuivermty  of  UlaaKow  ;  wiih  Llcintiitii  ui  I'latiu  and  ^phullc..l 
riiK(>iioiii<ary. 

KOSS'S  LATIN  (aiAMMAR.  — Comprising  all  the  Rules  nnd  ObserMitions 
necuHtary  to  an  a<:<-iirali!  knowlcdiro  of  tho  Latin  Clanriicci,  having;  the  SsiKiid  of  Uuaiitity  ullixcd  lu  ctr- 
laiii  Hyllaliit'R  ;  willi  an  Alpliaheliual  Vocabulary. 

Ktl>i>13IAN«8  RUDIMENTS  OF  THE  LATIN  TONGUE,  new  and 
improved  edition,  with  Notes.    By  William  Mann,  A.M. 

AINSWORTIPS   LATIN   DICTION  ARY.— A  tiew  abridgment  of  Aiiis- : 
worih'ri  Dictionary,  Kniciish  and  Latin,  for  the  Ufw*  of  urammnr  iHciinolit    By   John  Dyimick,  I.L.  I).  | 
A  new  American  edition,  with  correcli'ms  and  improvemuntii,  by  Chiirif"  Anthon  Jay,  Profeiuur  of 
LaiiKuaK**  in  (Joiuinbia  ColleKe,  New  York,  and  Hector  of  the  (irnmniu:  School. 

CLARK'S  Ci9<lSAR.  —  The  Notes  and  Interpretations  translated  and  improved 
by  ThoiiiaH  C'lnrk.  Carefully' {Corrected  by  compnrigon  with  a  standard  London  etiilion,  and  containiiiK 
vuriouH  emendationii  in  the  Nolen.    Uy  Vvilliain  Mann,  A.M. 

PORNEY'S  SYLLABAIRE  FRANCAIS;  or,  FRENCH  SPELLINCS 
HOOK.  —  Revised,  corrected,  and  improved  by  J.  Meier,  late  Troiessor  of  French  and 
tierman  in  Yale  Univemity. 

KEITH'S  ARITHMETIC-  Practical  and  Sell-Kxplanatory.  By  an  expe- 
rienced  Teacher  of  Malhematicii.  To  which  are  added  a  Comprehuniiive  Treatise  on  Meiuuiatioii, 
and  an  original  and  perspicuous  System  of  Uook-Keeping. 

GUY  ON  ASTRONOMY,  AND  KEITH  ON  THE  GLOBES. 

BRIDGE'S  ALGEBRA.  4 

GOLDSMITH'S  NATURAL  HISTORY.  —  Abridged  for  the  use  of  Schools, 
by  Mrs.  Pilkinitton.  Revised  and  corrected  by  a  Teacher  of  Philadelphia,  with  Uuestions.  New  edi- 
tion i  illustrated  with  upwards  of  IQQ.new  and  h'-    Jsome  Engravings. 

SKEl'CHES  OF  THE  LIFE  AND  CHARACTER  OF  PATRICK 
HENRY.  —  By  William  Wirt.  Revised  edition,  with  headings  to  each  Chapter,  and 
such  an  arraiiKement  of  the  Noll's  contained  ia  the  former  editions,  as  to  render  tho  work  suiiable  for  a 
ClnDS-ltook  ill  Academies  and  Schools. 

PARLEY'S  COLUMBUS.-  -The  Life  of  Christopher  Columbus;  adapted  to 
tlie  U80  of  Schools,  with  Uue»tions  for  Examination,  and  numerous  Lngravingx. 

PARLEY'S  WASHINGTON.  — The  Life  of  General  George  Washington; 
adiipied  to  the  u^<e  of  Schools,  with  QuesUons  for  Examination,  and  numerous  Engravings. 

PARLEY'S  FRANKLIN. —The  Life  of  Bemamin  Franklm ;  adapted  to  the 
use  of  Schools,  with  Questions  for  Examination,  and  numerous  Engravings. 

PARLEY'S  AMERICA.  EUROPE,  ASIA.  AFRICA,  ROME,  GREECE. 
ISLANDS  TALRS  OF  THE  SEA,  WINTER  EVENING  TALES,  JUVENILE  TALES, 
ANKCDOTES.  SUN,  MOON.  AND  STARS. 

THE  CHILD'S  HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  ST ATES.-By  Charles 
A.  Goivdrich  ;  detigiitd  ua  a  First  Book  of  HiBtoru  for  Sciiools  ;  illustrated  by  numerous  Eiigravu.g* 
Mild  Aiiticdo)x>». 


iiltlHinilh'fi 
LngravioKii 

j'b  History 
ruviiiK».  by 

History  ol 
)y  Allit'itoii. 

H,  Ittgelll'T 
).,  I'.ir.t  ritiiH 

^sefMitioiis 
llixcti  lo  ctr- 

',  new  ami 

t  of  Aiii*- 
..rk.  l.l..  I». 
Frofessur  ut 

il  imprt)ved 
id  cuiiiainiiig 

ELLING 

b'rench  und 

f  an  expe- 
Meiuuiatiuii. 

ES. 


;  of  Schools, 

]g.    New  edi- 

ATRICK 

Chapter,  and 
Buiiuble  fur  a 

adapted  to 
Vashington  ; 

g8. 

apled  to  the 

GRKKCK. 
ILE  TALES, 

-By  Charles 
lUB  EiigruviiiK* 


